Outlook (2010) - Car Saturn - Free user manual and instructions

Brand	Saturn
Model	Outlook (2010)
Category	Full-size SUV / Crossover
Engine Type	3.6L V6 (LY7)
Horsepower	275 hp @ 6600 rpm
Torque	251 lb-ft @ 3200 rpm
Transmission	6-speed automatic (6T70)
Drivetrain	Front-wheel drive (standard), All-wheel drive (optional)
Fuel Type	Gasoline (regular unleaded)
Fuel Tank Capacity	20.0 gallons
Fuel Economy (EPA combined)	17 mpg (FWD), 16 mpg (AWD)
Seating Capacity	7-8 passengers (2nd row bench or captain chairs)
Length	200.7 in
Width	78.2 in (without mirrors)
Height	72.4 in (FWD), 72.5 in (AWD)
Wheelbase	118.9 in
Curb Weight	4725-4900 lbs depending on trim
Brakes (Front/Rear)	Disc / Disc with ABS
Safety Features	Front, side, and curtain airbags; StabiliTrak stability control; traction control; ABS
Tire Size	P255/65R18 (standard), P255/60R19 (optional)
Oil Capacity (with filter)	6.0 quarts (5.7 liters)
Recommended Oil	5W-30 (GM dexos1 certified)
Maintenance Interval	Oil change every 5000 miles; major service at 100,000 miles
Repairability Index	Average; parts widely available for this model

Frequently Asked Questions - Outlook (2010) Saturn

What type of oil does a 2010 Saturn Outlook take?

The 2010 Saturn Outlook requires 5W-30 engine oil that meets GM dexos1 specification. The oil capacity with filter is 6.0 quarts (5.7 liters).

How often should I change the oil on my Saturn Outlook?

GM recommends an oil change every 5,000 miles under normal driving conditions. Severe driving (towing, short trips, extreme temperatures) may require more frequent changes.

What is the correct tire pressure for a Saturn Outlook?

The recommended tire pressure is 35 psi (240 kPa) for both front and rear tires. Check the sticker on the driver's door jamb for exact specs.

How do I reset the oil life monitor on a 2010 Saturn Outlook?

Turn the ignition to On (but do not start). Press the MENU button on the steering wheel to enter the Vehicle Information menu. Scroll to Oil Life and press the SET/CLR button to reset. Confirm when prompted.

What type of transmission fluid does the Outlook use?

The 2010 Outlook uses DEXRON-VI automatic transmission fluid. There is a dipstick for checking fluid level, but no service interval under normal conditions.

How do I pair my phone with the Saturn Outlook Bluetooth?

Press the PHONE button on the radio. Say 'Bluetooth' then 'Pair'. The system will ask for a passkey (default 0000). On your phone, search for available devices, select 'Saturn Outlook', and enter the passkey.

What does the check engine light indicate?

A solid check engine light means a non-urgent issue (e.g., loose gas cap, oxygen sensor). A flashing light indicates a severe misfire that could damage the catalytic converter – stop driving immediately.

How do I change a headlight bulb on a Saturn Outlook?

Open the hood and locate the headlight assembly. Twist the dust cover counterclockwise to remove. Unplug the wiring harness from the bulb, press the retaining clip, and remove the old bulb. Install new bulb (H11 low beam, 9005 high beam) without touching the glass, then reassemble.

Where is the battery located in the Saturn Outlook?

The battery is located in the engine compartment, driver's side near the firewall. It is covered by a plastic access panel that snaps off.

What is the towing capacity of a 2010 Saturn Outlook?

When properly equipped with the trailering package, the Outlook can tow up to 4,500 lbs. Without the package, the maximum is 2,000 lbs.

USER MANUAL Outlook (2010) Saturn

2007 Saturn OUTLOOK Owner Manual

Seats and Restraint Systems 7

Front Seats 9

Rear Seats 18

Safety Belts 24

Child Restraints 48

Airbag System 76

Restraint System Check 93

Features and Controls 95

Keys 97

Doors and Locks 106

Windows 115

Theft-Deterrent Systems 119

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 123

Mirrors 139

OnStar ^® System 145

Universal Home Remote System 149

Storage Areas 161

Sunroof 165

Instrument Panel 167

Instrument Panel Overview 170

Climate Controls 194

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators 209

Driver Information Center (DIC) 228

Audio System(s) 260

Driving Your Vehicle 321

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle 322

Towing 358

Service and Appearance Care 375

Service 377

Fuel 379

Checking Things Under the Hood ..... 384

All-Wheel Drive 420

Headlamp Aiming 421

Bulb Replacement 422

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 424

Tires 425

Appearance Care 464

Vehicle Identification 474

Electrical System 475

Capacities and Specifications 483

Maintenance Schedule 485

Maintenance Schedule 486

Customer Assistance Information 503

Customer Assistance and Information ..... 504

Reporting Safety Defects 516

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ..... 519

Index 523

Three abstract geometric symbols: a stylized white 'K' on black background, a solid black rectangle with 'GM' in white on right, and a black square with a curved line on left (no text or labels)

SATURN and the SATURN Emblem are registered trademarks of Saturn Corporation. GENERAL MOTORS and GM are registered trademarks and the name OUTLOOK is a trademark of General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes after that time without further notice.

This manual describes features that may be available in this model, but your vehicle may not have all of them. For example, more than one entertainment system may be offered or your vehicle may have been ordered without a front passenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.

Canadian Owners

A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer/retailer or from:

Helm, Incorporated

P.O. Box 07130

Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This Manual

Many people read the owner manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle to learn about the vehicle's features and controls. Pictures and words work together to explain things.

Index

A good place to quickly locate information about the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.

Part No. 15861569 B Second Printing

©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

Safety Warnings and Symbols

There are a number of safety cautions in this book. A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the warning.

CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people.

We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not, you or others could be hurt.

No smoking symbol (circle with diagonal line) indicating no restrictions)

A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means "Do Not," "Do Not do this" or "Do Not let this happen."

Vehicle Damage Warnings

You will also find notices in this manual.

Notice: These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your vehicle's warranty, and it could be costly. The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle Symbols

The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component, control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of a component, gage, or indicator, reference the following topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
  • Climate Controls in Section 3
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
  • Audio System(s) in Section 3
  • Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

CAUTION POSSIBLE INJURY		LATCH BOTH LAP AND SHOULDER BELTS TO PROTECT OCCUPANT DO NOT TWIST SAFETY BELT WHEN ATTACHING		MASTER LIGHTING SWITCH	ENGINE COOLANT TEMP	TIRE PRESSURE
PROTECT EYES BY SHIELDING		FASTEN SEAT BELTS	AIRBAG	TURN SIGNALS	BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM	FUSE BOX ACCESS
CAUSTIC BATTERY ACID COULD CAUSE BURNS		MOVE SEAT FULLY REARWARD SECURE CHILD SEAT	DO NOT INSTALL A REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN THIS SEATING POSITION	PARKING LAMPS	BRAKE	ENGINE COOLANT FAN
				HAZARD WARNING FLASHER	COOLANT	FUEL
AVOID SPARKS OR FLAMES		PULL BELT OUT COMPLETELY THEN SECURE CHILD SEAT	DO NOT INSTALL A FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN THIS SEATING POSITION	DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS	ENGINE OIL PRESSURE	OWNER MANUAL
SPARK OR FLAME COULD EXPLODE BATTERY		POWER WINDOW	DOOR LOCK UNLOCK	FOG LAMPS	ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM	SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

Front Seats 9

Manual Seats 9

Driver Seat Height Adjuster 10

Power Seats 10

Manual Lumbar 11

Power Lumbar 12

Heated Seats 12

Memory Seat and Mirrors 13

Reclining Seatbacks 15

Head Restraints 17

Rear Seats 18

Rear Seat Operation 18

Third Row Seats 21

Safety Belts 24

Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone 24

Questions and Answers About Safety Belts 28

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 29

Driver Position 30

Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment 38

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 39

Right Front Passenger Position 39

Rear Seat Passengers 40

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides 43

Safety Belt Pretensioners 47

Safety Belt Extender 47

Child Restraints 48

Older Children 48

Infants and Young Children 51

Child Restraint Systems 55

Where to Put the Restraint 59

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) 61

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position 69

Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position 72

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

Airbag System 76

Where Are the Airbags? 79

When Should an Airbag Inflate? 82

What Makes an Airbag Inflate? 83

How Does an Airbag Restrain? 84

What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? 84

Passenger Sensing System 86

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 91

Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 92

Restraint System Check 93

Checking the Restraint Systems 93

Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash 94

Front Seats

Manual Seats

CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is not moving.

A. Manual Seat Adjustment Bar.
B. Driver Seat Height Adjuster. See DriverSeat HeightAdjusteronpage10.
C. Manual Reclining Seatback Lever. See RecliningSeatbacksonpage15.

If your vehicle has a manual bucket seat you can adjust the seat forward or rearward with the bar located under the front of the seat cushion.

Lift the bar to unlock the seat. Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place.

Driver Seat Height Adjuster

If your vehicle has a manual driver seat height adjuster, it is located on the outboard side of the seat. See ManualSeatsonpage9for more information. To raise the seat, move the lever upward repeatedly until the seat is at the desired height. To lower the seat, move the lever downward repeatedly until the seat is at the desired height.

Power Seats

Driver's Seat with Power Seat Control, Power Recline, and Power Lumbar shown

A. Power Seat Adjustment Control.
B. Power Reclining Seatback Control. See RecliningSeatbacksonpage15.
C. Power Lumbar Control. See PowerLumbaron page12.

If the vehicle has power seats, the controls used to operate them are located on the outboard side of the seats.

Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward.

Your vehicle may have additional features to adjust your vehicle's power seat:

• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire control up or down.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by moving the rear of the control up or down.

Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows seat settings to be saved and recalled. See MemorySeatandMirrorsonpage13for more information.

Manual Lumbar

Line drawing of a person's seatbelt and shoulder joint (no text or symbols)

If your vehicle has this feature, the handle is located on the inboard side of the seatback. See ManualSeats onpage9for more information.

Turn the handle rearward to decrease lumbar support. Turn the handle forward to increase lumbar support.

Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as it may during long trips, so should the position of your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.

Power Lumbar

If the seats have power lumbar, the controls used to operate this feature are located on the outboard side of the seats. See PowerSeatson page10 for more information.

• To increase lumbar support, press and hold the front of the control.
• To decrease lumbar support, press and hold the rear of the control.
• To raise the height of the lumbar support, press and hold the top of the control.
• To lower the height of the lumbar support, press and hold the bottom of the control.

Release the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of lumbar support.

Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as it may during long trips, so should the position of your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.

Heated Seats

On vehicles with heated front seats the controls are located on the center console near the climate controls. To operate the heated seats the ignition must be on.

(Heated Seatback): Press this button to turn on the heated seatback.

(Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this button to turn on the heated seat and seatback.

The light on the button will come on to indicate that the feature is working. Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high, medium, and low and to turn the heat to the seat off. Indicator lights above the button will show the level of heat selected: three for high, two for medium, and one for low.

The heated seats will turn off ten seconds after the ignition is turned off. If you want to use the heated seat feature after you restart your vehicle, you will need to press the heated seat or seatback button again.

If your vehicle has remote vehicle start and is started using the remote keyless entry transmitter, the front heated seats will be turned on to the high setting if it is cold outside. See "Remote Vehicle Start" under RemoteKeylessEntry(RKE) SystemOperationonpage100. When the key is inserted into the ignition and the ignition is turned on, the heated seat feature will turn off. To turn the heated seat feature back on, press the desired button.

Memory Seat and Mirrors

Your vehicle may have the memory package.

The controls for this feature are located on the driver's door panel, and are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver's seat and outside mirrors.

To save your positions in memory, do the following:

1. Adjust the driver's seat, including the seatback recliner and lumbar and both outside mirrors to a comfortable position.
   See OutsidePowerMirrorsonpage142for more information.
   Not all mirrors will have the ability to save and recall the mirror positions.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps let you know that the position has been stored.

A second seating and mirror position can be programmed by repeating the above steps and pressing button 2.

To recall the memory positions, the vehicle must be in PARK (P). Press and release either button 1 or button 2 corresponding to the desired driving position. The seat and outside mirrors will move to the position previously stored. You will hear a single beep.

If you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to enter your vehicle and the remote recall memory feature is on, automatic seat and mirror movement will occur. See “MEMORY SEAT RECALL” under DICVehicleCustomization (WithDICButtons)onpage250for more information.

To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any time, press one of the power seat controls, memory buttons, or power mirror buttons.

If something has blocked the driver's seat while recalling a memory position, the driver's seat recall may stop working. If this happens, press the appropriate control for the area that is not recalling for two seconds, after the obstruction is removed. Then try recalling the memory position again by pressing the appropriate memory button. If the memory position is still not being recalled, see your dealer/retailer for service.

Easy Exit Seat

The control for this feature is located on the driver's door panel between buttons 1 and 2.

With the vehicle in PARK (P), the exit position can be recalled by pressing the exit button. You will hear a single beep. The driver's seat will move back.

If the easy exit seat feature is on in the Driver Information Center (DIC), automatic seat movement will occur when the key is removed from the ignition. See "EASY EXIT SEAT" under DICVehicleCustomization(WithDICButtons) onpage250for more information.

Further programming for the memory seat feature can be done using the DIC. You can select or cancel the following:

• The automatic easy exit seat feature.
• The remote memory seat recall feature.

For programming information, see DICVehicle Customization(WithDICButtons)onpage250.

Reclining Seatbacks Manual Reclining Seatbacks

CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is not moving.

CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

In vehicles with seats that have manual reclining seatbacks, the lever used to operate them is located on the outboard side of the seat.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to an upright position, do the following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback and the seatback will return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

In vehicles with seats that have power reclining seatbacks, the control used to recline them is located on the outboard side of the seat behind the power seat control. See PowerSeatson page10for more information.

• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control rearward.
• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the control forward.

Illustration of a person lying on their back with a string and a circular symbol above, no text or symbols present.

CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you are reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash, the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.

Head Restraints

Line drawing of a person seated in a car seat, viewed from the side (no text or symbols)

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant's head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

Simple line drawing of a human torso with an arrow pointing to the lower chest area (no text or symbols)

Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head restraint, press the release button, located on the headrest post on the top of the seatback, while you push the head restraint down.

Rear Seats

Rear Seat Operation

A. Seat Adjustment Handle.
B. Reclining Seatback Strap.
C. Sliding Seat Lever.

Entering and Exiting the Third Row

CAUTION:

Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat.

Line drawing of a mechanical device with attached components (no text or symbols)

To access the third row:

1. Make sure there are no objects on the floor in front of or on the second row seat, or in the seat tracks on the floor.
2. On seats with folding armrests, make sure the armrest is in the upright position.
3. Make sure the safety belt is unfastened and in the stowed position.
4. Pull the sliding seat lever (C) forward and move the seatback forward. The seat cushion will automatically fold, and the entire seat will slide forward.

Returning the Seat to the Seating Position

To return the second row seat to its normal seating position:

1. Make sure there are no objects on the floor behind the second row seat, or in the seat tracks on the floor.
2. Pull the seatback rearward until it is locked in place.
3. Slide the seat rearward by pushing on the seatback until it is locked into place.
4. Push down on the rear of the seat cushion until it is locked in place.
5. Push and pull on the seatback and seat cushion to make sure they are locked in place
6. Make sure the safety belt is not under the seat cushion.

Reclining the Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Leaning forward in the seat, pull the reclining seatback strap (B).
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then release the strap to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.

Folding the Rear Seat

To fold the second row seats:

1. Make sure there is nothing on or under the seat.

2. Make sure the armrest is in the upright position, and the safety belt is unfastened.

3. Pull forward on the reclining seatback strap (B) and push down on the seatback.

4. If the headrest hits the front seat, slide the second row seat rearward.

To return the seatback to the seating position, lift the upper corner of the seatback and push it rearward until it locks into place. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.

Adjusting the Seats

To adjust the second row seats, pull outward on the seat adjustment handle (A). Slide the seat forward or rearward to the desired position. Release the handle and push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked.

Third Row Seats

CAUTION:

Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded, or pushed forward in the entry position, could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place.

The third row seats can be folded forward or removed.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat.

To fold the seatback:

1. Make sure there is nothing on or under the seat.

Line drawing of a hand using a tool to clamp or attach a cable (no text or symbols present)

1. Disconnect the rear safety belt mini-latch, using a key in the slot on the mini-buckle, let the belt retract into the headliner. Stow the mini-latch in the holder located in the headliner.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical device with a central component and a vertical shaft (no text or symbols)

1. Pull up on the release lever located on the back of the seat. The headrest moves forward automatically.

2. Push the seatback forward to lay flat.

To return the seatback to the seating position:

1. Raise the seatback into place by using the pullstrap from the rear of the vehicle, or by pushing it into place from inside the vehicle.
2. Make sure the headrest is locked into place before sitting in the seat.

CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

1. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked in place.

CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After raising the rear seatback, always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted.

1. Make sure the safety belt is not twisted, and reconnect the center safety belt mini-latch to the mini-buckle.
2. Pull on the safety belt to be sure the mini-latch is secure.

Removing the Third Row Seats

1. Remove the cargo management system, if it is in the vehicle. See CargoManagementSystem onpage164.
2. Make sure there is nothing on or under the seat.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat.

1. Fold the seatback down. See Folding the Seatback earlier in this section.
2. Remove the rear bolts located on the floor on each side of the seat.
3. Remove the seat by tilting it slightly upward, and then pulling it out of the rear of the vehicle in one motion.
4. Put the bolts back into the holes on the floor so they do not get misplaced.

Installing the Third row Seats

1. Make sure the seatback is folded forward before installing the seat. See Folding the Seatback earlier in this section.
   The seats must be placed in the proper locations for the legs to attach correctly. The wider seat must be installed on the driver side and the narrower seat on the passenger side. Make sure to remove the bolts from the holes in the floor before installing the seats.
2. Place the seat on the vehicle floor so that the front seat hooks are on the vehicle bars.
3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to 55 N·m (41 lb ft). Pull up on the seat to make sure it is locked in place.
4. Raise the seatback to its upright position. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked into place.
5. Push the headrest up into position. Push and pull on the headrest to make sure it is locked into place.

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone

This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts.

CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and you are not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passengers' belts are fastened properly too.

CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and your passengers to buckle your safety belts. See SafetyBeltReminderLightonpage211and PassengerSafetyBeltReminderLighton page212.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here is why: Theywork.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.

Illustration of a small electric vehicle with wheels and seat, resting on a paved surface (no text or symbols)

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on wheels.

Illustration of a person seated in a mobility scooter on a platform (no text or symbols visible)

Illustration of a robot sitting on a platform next to a robotic car (no text or symbols)

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider does not stop.

Black-and-white photo of a child sitting on a large vehicle, viewed from above (no visible text or symbols)

The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

Black-and-white photo of two figures in traditional attire, one standing and one seated, with no visible text or symbols.

or the instrument panel...

Black-and-white photo of a person seated in a car, wearing a cap and checkered pattern (no visible text or symbols)

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why safety belts make such good sense.

Questions and Answers About Safety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an accident — even one that is not your fault — you and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly

This part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see OlderChildrenonpage48or InfantsandYoung Childrenonpage51. Follow those rules for everyone's protection.

First, you will want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder Belt

The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see how, see "Seats" in the Index.

Line drawing of a person using a bandage to grip a sleeve, no text or symbols present

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.

Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

1. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see SafetyBeltExtenderonpage47.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height that is right for you. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See ShoulderBeltHeightAdjustmentonpage38.

Line drawing of a person using a belt buckle to lift a seatbelt (no text or symbols present)

1. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

Illustration of human skeletal anatomy with a belt and shoulder, shown from front and side views (no text or labels)

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as much protection this way.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as much protection this way.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap belt and apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The belt is over an armrest.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this. The belt would be much too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The belt force would then be applied at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.

Illustration of a person performing a bandage exercise with a tool (no text or symbols present)

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The belt should go back out of the way. When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing. The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment

Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Incorrect positioning of the shoulder belt can reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with labeled section A (no text or symbols beyond label)

To move it down, push down on the button (A) and move the height adjuster to the desired position. You can move the height adjuster up by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide.

After you move the height adjuster to where you want it, try to move it down without pushing the button down to make sure it has locked into position.

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy

Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

Illustration of a person performing a medical procedure on a patient's arm (no text or symbols present)

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Right Front Passenger Position

To learn how to wear the right front passenger's safety belt properly, see DriverPositionon page30.

The right front passenger's safety belt works the same way as the driver's safety belt — except for one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature. If this happens, let the belt go back all the way and start again.

Rear Seat Passengers

It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder Belt

All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. If you are using the center third row seating position and the safety belt is not attached, see ThirdRowSeatsonpage21for instruction on reconnecting the safety belt to the mini-buckle.

Here is how to wear one properly.

Line drawing of a person using a belt to grip a seat (no text or symbols)

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted.

The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

1. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.

When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again.

If the belt is not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extenderonpage47.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

Line drawing of a person adjusting a belt buckle (no text or symbols)

1. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder part.

It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

Illustration of human torso and neck anatomy with a black band indicating shoulder placement (no text or labels)

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

Illustration of a person performing a bandage exercise with a bandage (no text or symbols present)

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. For outboard seating positions, when the safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing. The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides

Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck and head.

There is a guide for each outboard passenger positions in the second row seat and all passenger positions in the third row. Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt:

Technical line drawing of a mechanical clamp or bracket (no text or symbols)

Outboard Positions

1. For the outboard positions, remove the guide from its storage clip on the interior body.

Diagram of a hand holding a string with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Third Row Center Position

For the third row center position, locate the comfort guide which is located in a storage pocket, at the top of the seat, under the headrest on the driver's side of the vehicle.

To access the comfort guide, you will first need to move the headrest forward by pulling on the handle behind the seatback. The comfort guide will now be accessible. Pull the comfort guide out of its storage location and then return the headrest to its upright position.

The elastic cord on the comfort guide is adjustable. You can make it longer or shorter by squeezing the both ends of the plastic adjuster.

Illustration of hands adjusting a cable clip with a clamp (no text or symbols)

1. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.

Pure diagram of a cable or wire connection with no text, numbers, or symbols

1. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top.

CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

Illustration of a person wearing a seatbelt and holding a long object (no text or symbols present)

1. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as described in RearSeatPassengerson page40. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guide. Slide the guide into its storage location or on its storage clip.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver and right front passenger. Although you cannot see them, they are part of the safety belt assembly. They help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal, near frontal or side crash or a rollover if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other new parts for your safety belt system. See ReplacingRestraintSystemParts AfteraCrashonpage94.

Safety Belt Extender

If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Illustration of two people wearing matching scarves, seated side by side (no text or symbols)

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle's safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts properly.

CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the same belt. The belt cannot properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only one person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt, but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child's face or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window, move the child toward the center of the vehicle. Also see RearSafetyBelt ComfortGuidesonpage43. If the child is sitting in the center rear seat passenger position, move the child toward the safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child's shoulder, so that in a crash the child's upper body would have the restraint that belts provide.

CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in a crash the child might slide under the belt. The belt's force would then be applied right on the child's abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries.

Illustration of a person sitting in a chair with a diagonal band and a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels)

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child's thighs. This applies belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash.

Infants and Young Children

Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.

CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by appropriate restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle's adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need to use a child restraint.

CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person's arms. A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint.

Illustration of a person seated in a car with a seatbelt, no text or symbols present

CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide.

Line drawing of a person using a seatbelt to lift a passenger seat (no text or symbols)

Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the vehicle's owner, are available in four basic types. Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child's weight, height, and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer's instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs.

CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support, including support for the head and neck. This is necessary because a newborn infant's neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant's body, the back and shoulders. Infants always should be secured in appropriate infant restraints.

CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom the safety belts are designed. A young child's hip bones are still so small that the vehicle's regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young children always should be secured in appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Line drawing of a small box with handles and a pair of screws inside, labeled (A) (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant's head rests toward the center of the vehicle.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical device with handle and seat (no text or symbols)

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

Line drawings of three different car seat designs labeled (C), (D), and (E), showing different seat configurations with no text or symbols.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for the child's body with the harness and also sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.

Line drawings of two car seat compartments labeled (F) and (G), showing different seat designs and mounting points (no text or symbols present)

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designed for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position children. A built-in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a portable one, which is purchased by the vehicle's owner. To help reduce injuries, an add-on child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints, the child has to be secured within the child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both.

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in the Vehicle

CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child restraint is properly installed in the vehicle using the vehicle's safety belt or LATCH system, following the instructions that came with that restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower AnchorsandTethersforChildren(LATCH)on page61for more information. A child can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.

Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint

There are several systems for securing the child within the child restraint. One system, the three-point harness, has straps that come down over each of the infant's shoulders and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, and a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child's body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side.

CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Make sure the child is properly secured, following the instructions that came with that restraint.

Because there are different systems, it is important to refer to the instructions that come with the restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint.

Where to Put the Restraint

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.

We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says, "Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front." This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger's airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger's frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) if the system detects a rear-facing child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off. We recommend that rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag(s) are off.

If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)

The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle's safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with that restraint, and also the instructions in this manual. When installing a child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint. A child restraint must never be attached using only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its attachments. The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. In the United States, some child restraints also have a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations

Two identical stylized bottle containers with circular icons, no text or symbols present

Second Row — Bucket

(Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors.
② (Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two lower anchors.

Simple line drawing of a two-panel table with three identical icons on top (no text or symbols)

Second Row — 60/40 Bench

(Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors.
② (Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two lower anchors.

(Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors.

Simple line drawing of a rectangular box with six compartments and a small bird icon on top (no text or symbols)

Third Row

Simple white icon of a person sitting on a chair inside a black circle (no text or symbols)

To assist you in locating the lower anchors, each second row anchor position has a label, near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.

Simple line drawing of a person sitting on a bench with an anchor symbol above, enclosed in a square frame (no text or labels)

To assist you in locating the top tether anchors, the top tether anchor symbol is located on the trim cover or near the anchor.

Line drawing of a medical device with an arrow indicating rotation, shown alongside an inset image of the same device (no text or symbols present)

Second Row — Bucket Shown, Bench Similar

The top tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seatback for each seating position in the second row. Open the trim cover to access the anchors. Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed.

Line drawing of a car seat with a downward arrow pointing to the lower side of the seat (no text or symbols)

Third Row Seat

The third row has one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear of the center seatback. This anchor should be used for the center seating position only. Never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right front passenger position or the third row outboard seating positions, if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached. There is no place to attach the top tether in these positions.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See Where to Put the Restrainton page 59 for additional information.

Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System

CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to anchors, the restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle's safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with that restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.

CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the vehicle is designed to hold only one child restraint. Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash. A child or others could be injured if this happens. To help prevent injury to people and damage to your vehicle, attach only one child restraint per anchor.

CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Secure any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has been installed. Be sure to follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint or the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle's safety belt assembly may cause damage to these parts. Make sure when securing unused safety belts behind the child restraint that there is no contact between the child restraint or the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle's safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the seat. When removing the child restraint, always remember to return the safety belts to their normal, stowed position before folding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors, secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts. Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position.
1.2. Recline the seatback to the full reclined position.

Make sure the second row bench seatbacks are aligned at the same angle before placing the child restraint on the seat. Make sure the third row bench seatbacks are both upright before placing the child restraint on the seat.

1.3. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.4. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors.

1. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, if the vehicle has one. Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. If the anchor is covered, flip open the trim cover to expose the anchor.

2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions:

Diagram of a mechanical device with a lever and handle, no visible text or symbols

If the position you are using does not have a head rest/restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback.

Pure mechanical component diagram without any text, numbers, or symbols

If the position you are using does not have a head rest/restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether over the seatback.

Line drawing of a person seated in a chair holding a medical device (no text or symbols)

If the position you are using has a fixed head rest/restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether around the head rest/restraint.

Line drawing of a mechanical device with a lever and attached bracket (no text or symbols)

If the position you are using has a fixed head rest/restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the head rest/restraint.

1. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see LowerAnchorsandTethersforChildren (LATCH)onpage61.

There are no top tether anchors in the third row outboard seating positions. Do not secure a child restraint in these positions if a national or local law requires that a top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the restraint say that the top tether must be anchored.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system, you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt buckle being inserted, showing hand placement and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

1. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

Line drawing of a person seated in a chair using a belt switch (no text or symbols)

1. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock.

Line drawing of a person using a tool to lift a chair (no text or symbols present)

1. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be able to pull more of the belt from the retractor once the lock has been set.

2. If your child restraint has a top tether, and the position that you are using has a top tether anchor, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions that came with the child restraint and to Lower AnchorsandTethersforChildren(LATCH) onpage61.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.

When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing. The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.

Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position

Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where toPuttheRestraintonpage59.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing system. The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is detected. See Passenger SensingSystemonpage86and PassengerAirbag StatusIndicatoronpage214for more information on this, including important safety information.

A label on your sun visor says, "Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front." This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger's airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger's frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off. We recommend that rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if the airbags are off.

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see LowerAnchorsandTethersforChildren (LATCH)onpage61.

There is no top tether anchor at the right front seating position. Do not secure a child seat in this position if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored. See LowerAnchors andTethersforChildren(LATCH)onpage61if the child restraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.

Your vehicle has a right front passenger's frontal airbag. See PassengerSensingSystemon page86. We recommend that rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if the airbags are off.

1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. See ManualSeatsonpage9or PowerSeats onpage10.
   When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger's frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See Passenger AirbagStatusIndicatoronpage214.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt buckle being inserted, showing hand placement and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

1. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

Line drawing of a person seated in a chair using a belt switch (no text or symbols)

1. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock.

Line drawing of a person using a tool to lift a vehicle (no text or symbols present)

1. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be able to pull more of the belt from the retractor once the lock has been set.

2. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.

If the airbag is off, the off indicator will be lit and stay lit when you start the vehicle.

If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that the vehicle's seatback is not pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle's seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your dealer/retailer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing. The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the safety belt, near the upper anchor on the side wall.

Airbag System

Your vehicle has the following airbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front passenger.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver, passenger directly behind the driver, and the third row outboard passenger position.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger, passenger directly behind the right front passenger, and the third row outboard passenger position.

All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear along the headliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Even though today's airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system:

CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are designed to work with safety belts, but do not replace them.

CAUTION:

Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crashes. They are not designed to inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where something hits the side of your vehicle. They are not designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes. Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where something hits the side of your vehicle, during a vehicle rollover, or in a severe frontal impact. They are not designed to inflate in rear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person.

CAUTION:

Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you would be if you were sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail airbags.

CAUTION:

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren onpage48or InfantsandYoungChildren onpage51.

Simple black silhouette of a running person (no text or symbols)

There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See AirbagReadinessLighton page212for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

Black-and-white illustration of a man sitting in a car, holding a large circular object on his seat (no text or symbols visible)

The driver's frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel.

Illustration of a person sitting in a car seat, holding a large circular object (no text or symbols visible)

The right front passenger's frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger's side.

Black-and-white illustration of a person wearing a seatbelt and driving a car (no text or symbols visible)

Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door.

Black-and-white illustration of three people seated in a car, with no visible text or symbols

Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger, passengers behind the driver and right front passenger, and the third row outboard passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows.

CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag.

If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, never secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by routing the rope or tie down through any door or window opening. If you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?

Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver's or right front passenger's head and chest. However, they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants.

Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and how quickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.

Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags. Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.

Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact. Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the system's designed threshold level. The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck, or if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over, or in a severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined by the location and severity of the side impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag deployment is determined by the direction of the roll.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?

In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows that have occupant seating positions.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?

In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts.

Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's upper body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the first, second, and third rows. The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events, although no system can prevent all such ejections. But airbags would not help in many types of collisions, primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward those airbags. See WhenShould anAirbagInflate?onpage82for more information.

Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts.

What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates?

After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they deploy. Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see WhatMakes anAirbagInflate?onpage83.

The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you should seek medical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for those features.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash. See VehicleDataRecordingand Privacyonpage519and EventDataRecorders onpage520.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly. See your dealer/retailer for service.

Passenger Sensing System

Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger's position. The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument panel when you start your vehicle.

United States Canada

The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, will be visible during the system check. If you are using remote start to start your vehicle from a distance, if equipped, you may not see the system check. When the system check is complete, either the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off, will be visible. See PassengerAirbagStatusIndicatoron page214.

The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag under certain conditions. The driver's airbags are not part of the passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger's seat. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the right front passenger's frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.

We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says, "Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front." This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger's airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger's frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off. We recommend that rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if the airbags are off.

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger's frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbags are off. See PassengerAirbag StatusIndicatoronpage214.

If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following the child restraint manufacturer's directions and refer to Securinga ChildRestraintintheRightFrontSeatPosition onpage72.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that the vehicle's seatback is not pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle's seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint. See HeadRestraints onpage17.

Remove any additional material from the seat cushion before reinstalling or securing the child restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and check with your dealer/retailer.

The passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate) the right front passenger's frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger's seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbags are active.

For some children who have outgrown child restraints and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag, depending upon the person's seating posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front passenger's seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the person's legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for two to three minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person and then enable the right front passenger's frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag.

Interior view of a car showing a person seated in a seat, steering wheel, and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use.

CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in the instrument panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle serviced promptly, because an adult-size person sitting in the right front passenger's seat may not have the protection of the airbag(s). See AirbagReadinessLighton page212for more on this, including important safety information.

A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates. Remove any additional material from the seat cushion before reinstalling or securing the child restraint and before a small occupant, including a small adult, sits in the right front passenger's seat. You may want to consider not using seat covers or other aftermarket equipment.

See AddingEquipmenttoYourAirbag-Equipped Vehicleonpage92for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates.

CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger's seat or between the passenger's seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system.

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle

Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in several places around your vehicle. You do not want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see ServicePublicationsOrderingInformationon page518.

CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.

Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q:Is there anything I might add to the exterior of the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle's frame, bumper system, height, front end or side sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from working properly. Also, the airbag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag sensors. If you have any questions about this, you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See Customer SatisfactionProcedureonpage504.

If your vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see DifferentSizeTiresandWheelson page442for additional important information.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner, and pillar garnish trim, side impact sensors, rollover sensor module, or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system. If you have questions, call Customer Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See Customer SatisfactionProcedureonpage504.

Your dealer/retailer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint Systems

Safety Belts

Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages are working properly. See SafetyBeltReminderLightonpage211 for more information.

Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry. See CareofSafetyBeltsonpage467for more information.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Airbag System

The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag readiness light is working. See AirbagReadinessLightonpage212for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened, or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the location of the airbag modules, see WhatMakesanAirbag Inflate?onpage83. See your dealer/retailer for service.

Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash

CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH system parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn during a more severe crash, then you need new parts.

If the LATCH system was being used during a more severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.

Collision damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system was not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section.

If any airbag inflates, you will also need to replace the driver and front passenger's safety belt assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driver and front passenger's safety belt assemblies, even if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver and front passenger's safety belt assemblies contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag ReadinessLightonpage212.

Section 2 Features and Controls

Keys 97

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ...... 98

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation 100

Doors and Locks 106

Door Locks 106

Power Door Locks 107

Delayed Locking 107

Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..... 107

Rear Door Security Locks 108

Lockout Protection 109

Liftgate 109

Power Liftgate 110

Windows 115

Power Windows 116

Sun Visors 118

Theft-Deterrent Systems 119

Content Theft-Deterrent 119

PASS-Key ^® III+ 121

PASS-Key ^® III+ Operation 121

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 123

New Vehicle Break-In 123

Ignition Positions 124

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 125

Starting the Engine 126

Engine Coolant Heater 127

Automatic Transmission Operation 129

Tow/Haul Mode 132

Parking Brake 133

Shifting Into Park (P) 134

Shifting Out of Park (P) 136

Parking Over Things That Burn 136

Engine Exhaust 137

Running the Engine While Parked 138

Mirrors 139

Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar ^® ...... 139

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar® and Compass 139

Outside Power Mirrors 142

Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors 143

Outside Convex Mirror 144

Outside Heated Mirrors 145

Section 2 Features and Controls

OnStar® System 145

Universal Home Remote System 149

System Identification 149

Universal Home Remote System 149

Universal Home Remote System Operation (With One Triangular LED) 150

Universal Home Remote System Operation (With Three Round LED) ..... 154

Storage Areas 161

Glove Box 161

Cupholder(s) 161

Instrument Panel Storage Area 161

Center Console Storage Area 161

Floor Mats 162

Luggage Carrier 162

Rear Seat Armrest 163

Convenience Net 163

Cargo Cover 163

Cargo Tie Downs 163

Cargo Management System 164

Sunroof 165

Keys

CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

Illustration of two children inside a car, one adjusting the seat while the other watches (no text or symbols)

One key is used for the ignition and all locks.

When a new vehicle is delivered to the dealer/retailer, the key has a key tag. This tag has a bar-coded key code that tells your dealer/retailer how to make extra keys. This tag may be removed and kept by your dealer/retailer. If it has not been removed, keep the tag in a safe place. If you lose your key, your dealer/retailer can easily make another one by using the key code. See RoadsideAssistanceProgramonpage509for more information.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in operating range. This is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far from your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary. See "Battery Replacement" under RemoteKeylessEntry(RKE)System Operationonpage100.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation

The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions will work up to 195 feet (60 m) away. However, the operating range may be less while the vehicle is running.

There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry(RKE)Systemonpage98.

With Remote Start and Liftgate (Without Remote Start or Liftgate Similar)

The following functions may be available if your vehicle has the RKE system:

Ω (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has this feature, it may be started from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See "Remote Vehicle Start" following for more detailed information.

(Lock): Press the lock button to lock all the doors. If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parking lamps will flash once to indicate locking has occurred. If enabled through the DIC, the horn will chirp when the lock button is pressed again within five seconds of the previous press of the lock button. See DICVehicle Customization(WithDICButtons)onpage250for additional information. Pressing the lock button may arm the content theft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrentonpage119.

☑(Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock the driver's door. If the button is pressed again within five seconds, all remaining doors will unlock. The interior lamps will come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps will flash once to indicate unlocking has occurred.

See DICVehicleCustomization(WithDIC Buttons)onpage250. Pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitter will disarm the content theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrentonpage119.

(Power Liftgate): Press and hold this button on the RKE transmitter to open and close the liftgate. The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound to indicate when the liftgate is opening and closing.

(Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release this button to locate your vehicle. The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound three times. Press and hold this button for more than two seconds to activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm will turn off when the ignition is moved to ON or the alarm button is pressed again. The ignition must be in OFF for the panic alarm to work.

Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle

Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through your dealer/retailer. Remember to bring any additional transmitters so they can also be re-coded to match the new transmitter. Once your dealer/retailer has coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. The vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it. See “Relearn Remote Key” under DICOperationandDisplays (WithDICButtons)onpage229or DICOperation andDisplays(WithoutDICButtons)onpage235 for instructions on how to match RKE transmitters to your vehicle.

Battery Replacement

Under normal use, the battery in the RKE transmitter should last about four years.

The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work at the normal range in any location. If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it is probably time to change the battery.

The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY message in the vehicle's DIC will display if the RKE transmitter battery is low. See "REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY" under DICWarnings andMessagesonpage239for additional information.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter.

Line drawing of a handheld device with internal circuit board and connector (no text or symbols)

To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter do the following:

1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into the notch on the side of the transmitter and separate the bottom half from the top half.
2. Remove the old battery, but do not use a metal object to do this.

3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter with the positive side of the battery facing down. Use a type CR2032 battery, or equivalent type. Make sure the cover is on tightly, so water will not get in.

4. Snap the front and the back of the transmitter together.

5. Test the operation of the transmitter with the vehicle.

Remote Vehicle Start

Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature. This feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle. It may also start up the vehicle's heating or air conditioning systems and rear window defogger. Normal operation of the system will return after the key is turned to the ON position.

If your vehicle has an automatic climate control system, during remote start, the climate control system will default to a heating mode during colder outside temperatures and a cooling mode during warmer outside temperatures. If your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control system, during remote start, the climate control system will turn on at the setting the vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned off.

During a remote start, if your vehicle has an automatic climate control system and heated seats, the heated seats will turn on during colder outside temperatures and will shut off when the key is turned to RUN. If your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control system, during remote start, you will need to manually turn the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats for additional information

Laws in some communities may restrict the use of remote starters. For example, some laws may require a person using the remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so. Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.

The RKE transmitter with the remote start button, provides an increased range of operation. However, the range may be less while the vehicle is running. As a result, you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it off, than you were to turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry(RKE)Systemonpage98for additional information.

Ω (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE transmitter if you have remote start.

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature, do the following:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter's lock button, then immediately press and hold the transmitter's remote start button until the turn signal lights flash. If you cannot see the vehicle's lights, press and hold the remote start button for at least four seconds. The vehicle's doors will lock. Pressing the remote start button again, after the vehicle has started, will turn off the ignition.

When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn on and remain on while the vehicle is running.

1. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been driven, repeat these steps while the engine is still running, to extend the time by 10 minutes for the engine to continue to run. Remote start can be extended one time.

After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert and turn the key to the ON position to drive the vehicle.

If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done.

To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the following:

• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press the remote start button until the parking lamps turn off.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.

The vehicle can be remote started two separate times between driving sequences. The engine will run for 10 minutes after each remote start.

Or, you can extend the engine run time by another 10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time frame, and before the engine stops.

For example, if the lock button and then the remote start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle has been running for five minutes, 10 minutes are added, allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes.

The additional 10 minutes are considered a second remote vehicle start.

Once two remote starts, or a single remote start with one time extension has been done, the vehicle must be started with the key.

After the key is removed from the ignition, the vehicle can be remote started again.

The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there is an emission control system malfunction.

Also, the engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the oil pressure gets low.

Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle start system enabled. The system may be enabled or disabled through the DIC if your vehicle has DIC buttons. See “REMOTE START”

under DICVehicleCustomization(WithDIC Buttons)onpage250for additional information. If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, see your dealer/retailer to enable or disable the remote vehicle start system.

Remote Start Ready

If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start feature, it will have the remote start ready feature. This feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the manufacturer's remote vehicle start feature.

See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add the manufacturer's remote vehicle start feature to your vehicle.

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.

• Passengers, especially children, can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will not open it. You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive.
- Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it.

- Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening.

The vehicle's doors can be manually locked or unlocked in the following ways:

• From the outside, use the key in the driver's door.
• From the inside, use the lock control on the door.

Power Door Locks

The power door lock switches are located on the armrest on the front doors.

☑(Unlock): Press the side of the switch with the unlock symbol to unlock the doors.
(Lock): Press the side of the switch with the lock symbol to lock the doors.

Delayed Locking

When locking the doors with the power lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open, the doors will lock five seconds after the last door is closed. You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switch twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed locking feature and immediately lock all the doors.

This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.

You can program this feature using the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DELAY DOOR LOCK under DICVehicleCustomization(WithDIC Buttons)onpage250.

Programmable Automatic Door Locks

Vehicles with an automatic lock/unlock feature enable you to program the vehicle's power door locks. You can program this feature through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC VehicleCustomization(WithDICButtons) onpage250for more information on DIC programming.

Rear Door Security Locks

Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.

graph TD
    A["Process Step"] --> B["Person Icon Icon"]

Lock Label shown

The rear door security locks are located on the inside edge of each rear door. You must open the rear doors to access them. The label showing lock and unlock positions is located near the lock.

To set the locks, do the following:

1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

When you want to open a rear door when the security lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the power door lock switch, or by lifting the rear door manual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.

Lockout Protection

This feature protects you from locking the key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a front door is open.

If the driver's side power door lock switch is pressed when the driver's door is open and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock and then the driver's door will unlock.

If the passenger's side power door lock switch is pressed when the front passenger's door is open and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock and then the front passenger's door will unlock.

Liftgate

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

If you must drive with the liftgate open, or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the liftgate:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed with the recirculation mode off. That will force outside air into your vehicle. See ClimateControlSystem page194.
• If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel, open them all the way.
• If your vehicle has a power liftgate, disable the power liftgate function.

See PowerLiftgateonpage110.

If your vehicle has a power liftgate, see Power Liftgateonpage110.

To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lock switch or press the door unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice. See RemoteKeylessEntry(RKE)System Operationonpage100.

To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the underside of the liftgate handle. The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to open the liftgate. To close the liftgate, use the pull cup or pull strap as an aid.

The liftgate has an electric latch. If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage, the liftgate will not open. The liftgate will resume operation when the battery is reconnected and charged.

If the battery is properly connected and has adequate voltage, and the liftgate still will not function, your vehicle should be taken to a dealership for service.

Power Liftgate

Power Liftgate Operation

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.

If you must drive with the liftgate open, or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the liftgate:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed with the recirculation mode off. That will force outside air into your vehicle. See ClimateControlSystemonpage194.

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

• If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel, open them all the way.
• If your vehicle has a power liftgate, disable the power liftgate function.

See PowerLiftgateonpage110.

Your vehicle may have a power liftgate. The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to use the power feature.

The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound when the power liftgate is used.

CAUTION:

You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power liftgate. Make sure there is no one in the way of the liftgate as it is opening and closing.

Notice: If you open the liftgate without checking for overhead obstructions such as a garage door, you could damage the liftgate or the liftgate glass. Always check to make sure the area above and behind the liftgate is clear before opening it.

The power liftgate can be power opened and closed in the following ways:

- Press and hold the power liftgate button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter until the liftgate starts moving. RemoteKeyless Entry(RKE)SystemOperationonpage100 for more information.

Power Liftgate Button on Center Console

• Pressing the liftgate button on the center console.
• Pressing the touchpad switch on the outside liftgate handle.

Pressing the buttons, or touchpad switch a second time while the liftgate is moving reverses the direction.

Diagram showing a device with a control panel and directional arrow, no text or symbols present

Power Liftgate Button Near Liftgate Latch

The liftgate can also be closed by pressing the power liftgate button next to the liftgate latch. Press the button a second time during liftgate operation to reverse that operation.

The power liftgate may be temporarily disabled under extreme temperatures, or under low battery conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate can still be operated manually.

If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P) while the power function is in progress, the liftgate power function will continue to completion. If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P) and accelerate before the power liftgate latches closed, the liftgate may reverse to the open position. Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. Always make sure the power liftgate is closed and latched before you drive away.

If you power open the liftgate and the liftgate support struts have lost pressure, the lights will flash and a chime will sound. The liftgate will stay open temporarily, then slowly close. See your dealer/retailer for service before using the liftgate.

Obstacle Detection Features

If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power open or close cycle, a warning chime will sound and the liftgate will automatically reverse direction to the full closed or open position. After removing the obstruction, the power liftgate operation can be used again. If the liftgate encounters multiple obstacles on the same power cycle, the power function will deactivate, and you must manually open or close the liftgate. The LIFTGATE OPEN warning message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) will indicate that the liftgate is open. After removing the obstructions, manually open the liftgate to the full open position or close the liftgate to the fully closed and latched position. The liftgate will now resume normal power operation.

Your vehicle has pinch sensors located on the side edges of the liftgate. If an object is caught between the liftgate and the body and presses against this sensor, the liftgate will reverse direction and open fully. The liftgate will remain open until it is activated again or closed manually. Do not force the liftgate open or closed during a power cycle.

Manual Operation of Power Liftgate

To change the liftgate to manual operation, press the switch on the center console to the OFF position.

With the power liftgate disabled and all of the doors unlocked, the liftgate can be manually opened and closed.

To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the handle on the outside of the liftgate, and lift the gate open. To close the liftgate, use the pull cup to lower the liftgate and close. The liftgate latch will power close. Always close the liftgate before driving.

If the RKE button or the power close button on the liftgate is pressed while power operation is disabled, the lights will flash three times, but the liftgate will not move.

It is not recommended that you drive with the liftgate open, however, if you must drive with the liftgate open, the liftgate should be set to manual operation by pressing the OFF switch on the center console.

The liftgate has an electric latch. If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage, the liftgate will not open. The liftgate will resume operation when the battery is reconnected and charged.

If the battery is properly connected with adequate voltage, the switch is not disabled, and the liftgate still will not function, your vehicle should be taken to a dealer/retailer for service.

Windows

CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather.

Line drawing of a child in a car seat with a 'no' symbol above, no text or labels present

Power Windows

CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. They can be overcome from extreme heat in warm or hot weather and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke.

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function with the keys in the ignition

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.

When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows.

The power window controls are located on each of the side doors.
Driver's Side shown

The driver's door also has switches that control the passenger and rear windows. The power windows work when the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY or ON or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower(RAP)onpage125.

Press the switch to lower the window.

Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the window.

Express-Down Windows

Windows that have the express-down feature allow the windows to be lowered without holding the switch. Press the window switch fully and release it to activate the express-down feature. The express mode can be cancelled at any time by briefly pressing, or pulling the switch.

Express-Up Window

Windows that have the express-up feature allow the windows to be raised all the way without holding the switch up. Pull the switch up fully and release it to activate the express-up feature. The express-up mode can be canceled at any time by briefly pressing, or pulling the switch.

Programming the Power Windows

If the battery one your vehicle has been recharged, disconnected, or replaced, windows with the express-up feature need to be reprogrammed for this feature to work. To program the window:

1. With the ignition in the ACCESSORY or RUN positions, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active, close all doors. See RetainedAccessoryPower(RAP)on page125.
2. Press and continue to hold the window switch until the window is fully open.
3. Pull up and hold the window switch to close the window. Continue to hold it briefly after the window is fully closed.
4. Repeat for each window that has the express up feature.

Anti-Pinch Feature

The anti-pinch feature is on windows with the express-up feature. If an object is in the way of the window as it is express-closing, or in certain weather conditions like severe icing, the window will stop and open to a factory preset position. The window functions normally once the obstruction is removed.

Window Lockout

(Window Lockout): The window lockout switch is located with the power window switches on the driver's door armrest. This feature prevents the rear passenger windows from operating, except from the driver's position. Press the switch to turn the lockout feature on or off. An indicator light will come on to show the lockout feature is on.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach the sun visor from the center mount and slide it along the rod from side-to-side to cover the driver or passenger side of the front window. Swing the sun visor to the side to cover the side window. It can be moved along the rod from side-to-side in this position also.

Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror

Your vehicle has lighted visor vanity mirrors on both the driver's and passenger's sun visors. Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on.

Theft-Deterrent Systems

Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-Deterrent

Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent alarm system.

Icon of a document with a lock symbol, representing file or document (no text or symbols present)

To activate the theft-deterrent system, do one of the following:

- Press the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter when any door is open. The security light should come on and flash. When the door is closed, the security light will stop flashing and stay on solid and then go off

after approximately 30 seconds. The content theft deterrent alarm is not armed until the security light goes off.

If the delayed locking feature is active, the alarm will not be activated until all doors are closed and the security light goes off.

- Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter when the driver door is closed.

The security light will come on solid for approximately 30 seconds and then go off. The content theft deterrent alarm is not armed until the security light goes off.

If a locked door is opened without using the key in the driver's door key cylinder or the RKE transmitter, a ten second pre-alarm will occur. The horn will chirp and the lights will flash. If the key is not placed in the ignition and turned to START or the door is not unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitter during the ten second pre-alarm, the alarm will go off. Your vehicle's headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for about two minutes, then will turn off to save the battery power.

The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the doors are locked with the vehicle's key or the manual door lock. It activates only if you use the power door lock switch with the door open or the RKE transmitter. You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off.

Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:

• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent system, the vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter. Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm if the system has been armed.

If you set off the alarm by accident, turn off the alarm by pressing unlock on the RKE transmitter or by placing the key in the ignition and turning it to START.

Testing the Alarm

To test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver's window and open the driver's door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the RKE transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for the security light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door. This should set off the alarm.

If the alarm does not sound when it should, but the vehicle's headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see FusesandCircuitBreakers onpage476.

If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle's headlamps do not flash, see your dealer/retailer for service.

PASS-Key ^® III+

The PASS-Key ^® III+ system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.

PASS-Key ^® III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.

PASS-Key ^® III+ Operation

Your vehicle has PASS-Key ^® III+ (Personalized Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key ^® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system. This means you do not have to do anything special to arm or disarm the system. It works when you insert or remove the key from the ignition.

When the PASS-Key ^® III+ system senses that someone is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes.

When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not start and the security light on the instrument panel cluster comes on, the key may have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to be not damaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you may also want to check the fuse, see FusesandCircuitBreakersonpage476. If the engine still does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the PASS-Key ^® III+ to have a new key made. In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Programonpage509.

It is possible for the PASS-Key ^® III+ decoder to “learn” the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. The following procedure is for programming additional keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key ^® III+ to have keys made and programmed to the system.

See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key ^® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.

To program the new key:

1. Verify that the new key has a stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not start, see your dealer/retailer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF, and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the ON position within five seconds of the original key being turned to the OFF position. The security light will turn off once the key has been programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to be programmed.

If you are ever driving and the security light comes on and stays on, you may be able to restart your engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key ^® III+ system, however, is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key ^® III+ system at this time.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key ^® III+ key, see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key ^® III+ to have a new key made.

The SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM message displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when there is a problem with the theft-deterrent system. See DICWarningsand Messagesonpage239for additional information.

Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines:

- If you have all-wheel drive, keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for the first 500 miles (805 km).

- Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.

- Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake linings.

- Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See TowingaTraileronpage362for the trailer towing capabilities of your vehicle and more information.

Following break-in, engine speed and load can be gradually increased.

Ignition Positions

With the key in the ignition, you can turn it to four different positions.

A (OFF): This is the only position in which you can remove the key. This position locks the ignition and transmission.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the ignition switch could cause damage or break the key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.

B (ACCESSORY): This position allows you to use things like the radio and the windshield wipers while the engine is off. This position will also allow you to turn off the engine. Use ACCESSORY if you must have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off, for example, if your vehicle is being pushed or towed.

C (ON): This is the position that the switch returns to after you start your engine and release the key. The switch stays in ON when the engine is running. But even when the engine is not running, you can use ON to operate your electrical power accessories, and to display some instrument panel warning lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the ACCESSORY or ON position with the engine off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.

D (START): This position starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will return to ON for normal driving.

Key In the Ignition

Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle, a chime will sound when you open the driver's door. Always remember to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you. This will lock your ignition and transmission. Also, always remember to lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may not be able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)

These vehicle accessories can be used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off:

• Audio System
• Power Windows
• Sunroof (if equipped)

Power to the windows and sunroof will work up to 10 minutes or until a door is opened.

The radio continues to work for 10 minutes or until the driver's door is opened.

For an additional 10 minutes of operation, close all the doors and turn the key to ON and then back to OFF.

All these features will work when the key is in the ON or ACCESSORY positions.

Starting the Engine

Place the transmission in the proper gear.

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start in any other position – this is a safety feature. To restart when you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts.

Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking System. This feature assists in starting the engine and protects components. If the ignition key is turned to the START position, and then released when the engine begins cranking, the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and the key is held in START for many seconds, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents cranking if the engine is already running. Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY or OFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of time, by returning the key to the START position immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to let the cranking motor cool down.

1. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds, especially in very cold weather (below 0^ F or -18^ C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your engine might not perform properly. Any resulting damage would not be covered by your vehicle's warranty.

Engine Coolant Heater

Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.

In very cold weather, 0^ F ( -18^ C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.

Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures above 32^ F ( 0^ C), use of the coolant heater is not required. Your vehicle may also have an internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord. This will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater when the temperature is at or above 0^ F ( -18^ C) as noted on the cord.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater

1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The cord is located on the driver's side of the engine compartment, it is routed around the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

1. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your dealer/retailer in the area where you will be parking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give you the best advice for that particular area.

Automatic Transmission Operation

Your vehicle has an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument panel cluster.

When using the Electronic Range Select Mode a number will display next to the L, indicating the current gear that has been selected.

See Electronic Range Select mode in this section for more information.

Your automatic transmission has a shift lever located on the console between the seats.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It is the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle cannot move easily.

CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See ShiftingIntoPark(P)onpage134. If you are pulling a trailer, see TowingaTrailer onpage362.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system.

You must fully apply your regular brake first and then press the shift lever button before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in ON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever, then push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into another gear. See ShiftingOutofPark(P)onpage136.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see IfYourVehicleisStuckinSand, Mud, Ice, or Snowonpage352.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not connect with the wheels. To restart when you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.

CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. If you need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), push your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the accelerator all the way down.

Notice: If your vehicle seems to accelerate slowly or not shift gears when you go faster, and you continue to drive your vehicle that way, you could damage the transmission. Have your vehicle serviced right away. You can drive in LOW (L) when you are driving less than 35 mph (56 km/h) and DRIVE (D) for higher speeds until then.

LOW (L): This position gives you access to gear ranges. This provides more engine braking but lower fuel economy than DRIVE (D). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.

Electronic Range Select Mode

Electronic Range Selector (ERS) mode allows you to choose the top-gear limit of the vehicle's transmission and the vehicle's speed while driving down hill or towing a trailer.

To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever to LOW (L).

Line drawing of a mechanical lever handle with no text or symbols

1. Press the plus/minus button located on the shift lever, to increase or decrease the gear range available based upon your current driving conditions and needs.

When you shift from DRIVE (D) to LOW (L), the transmission will shift to a pre-determined lower gear range. The highest gear available for this pre-determined range is displayed next to the L in the DIC. See DriverInformationCenter (DIC)onpage228and DICOperationand Displays(WithDICButtons)onpage229or DIC OperationandDisplays(WithoutDICButtons) onpage235for more information. The number displayed in the DIC is the highest gear that the transmission will be allowed to operate in.

However, your vehicle can automatically shift to lower gears as required by various driving conditions. This means that all gears below that number are available. For example, when FOURTH (4) is shown next to the L, FIRST (1) through FOURTH (4) gears are automatically shifted by the vehicle. You cannot shift into FIFTH (5) until the plus (+) button is used or you shift back into DRIVE (D) mode.

While in LOW (L), the transmission will prevent shifting to a lower gear range if the engine speed is too high for the gear range you are trying to select. You have a brief period of time to slow the vehicle speed. If vehicle speed is not reduced within the timeframe allowed, the lower gear range attempted will not be available. The highest possible gear that is allowed for that engine speed will display next to the L in the DIC. Try again to slow the vehicle speed and press the minus (−) button to the desired lower gear range.

Automatic Engine Grade braking is not available when the ERS is active. It is available in DRIVE (D) for both normal and Tow/Haul mode. While using the ERS, cruise control and the tow/haul mode can be used. See Tow/HaulMode onpage132for more information.

Tow/Haul Mode

Your vehicle may have a Tow/Haul mode.

Simple black silhouette of a train or cargo cart with two wheels (no text or symbols)

The button to turn it on or off is located on instrument panel under the climate controls.

Push the button to turn it on, push it again to deactivate the system. You can use this feature to assist when towing or hauling a heavy load.

When Tow/Haul is activated the Tow/Haul symbol will come on the instrument panel cluster. See Tow/HaulModeunder TowingaTraileron page362for more information.

Automatic Engine Grade Braking

Automatic Engine Grade Braking assists when driving on a downhill grade. It maintains the vehicle's speed by automatically implementing a shift schedule that uses the engine and the transmission to slow the vehicle. This reduces wear on the brakes system and increases control of the vehicle. The system constantly monitors the vehicle's speed, acceleration, throttle position, and whether the brake pedal is being pressed, and determines when to keep the current vehicle speed or to slow down. The system will then automatically command downshifts that reduces the vehicle's speed, until the brake pedal is no longer being pressed. This indicates the desired vehicle speed has been reached.

While in the Electronic Range Select (ERS) mode, grade braking is deactivated, allowing the driver to select a range and limiting the highest gear available. Grade braking is available for normal driving and in Tow/Haul mode.

See AutomaticTransmissionOperationon page129.

Parking Brake

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

To set the parking brake, push down the parking brake pedal down with your left foot.

If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. See BrakeSystemWarningLight onpage217.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving.

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot. Push down momentarily on the parking brake pedal with your left foot until you feel the pedal release, then slowly pull your foot up off the park brake pedal. If the parking brake is not released when you begin to drive, the brake system warning light will be on and a chime will sound warning you that the parking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see TowingaTraileronpage362.

Shifting Into Park (P)

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer, see TowingaTraileron page362.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in the button on the shift lever and pushing the shift lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not leave your vehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing the button. If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully locked in PARK (P).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called "torque lock." To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver's seat. To find out how, see ShiftingIntoPark(P)onpage134.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push your vehicle a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, then you will be able to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)

Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system. You have to apply your regular brake first and then press the shift lever button before you can shift from PARK (P). See Automatic Transmission Operation page 129.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into the gear you wish.

Parking Over Things That Burn

CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:

• The exhaust system sounds strange or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

• Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris.
  • Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

Running the Engine While Parked

It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know.

CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle. See the earlier caution under EngineExhaustonpage137.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if the climate control fan is at the highest setting. One place this can happen is a garage. Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in a garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See WinterDrivingonpage347.

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not move. See ShiftingIntoPark(P)on page134.

If you are pulling a trailer, see TowingaTraileron page362.

Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar®

When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position, adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or down and side to side. The day/night adjustment allows you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the lamps behind you. Move the lever to the right for nighttime use and to the left for daytime use.

There may also be three OnStar ^® buttons located at the bottom of the mirror face. See your dealer/retailer for more information on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar ^® . See OnStar ^® Systemonpage145for more information on the services OnStar ^® provides.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar® and Compass

Your vehicle may have an automatic-dimming rearview mirror with a compass.

There may be three additional buttons for the OnStar ^® system. See your dealer/retailer for more information on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar ^® . See OnStar ^® Systemonpage145for more information about the services OnStar ^® provides.

(On/Off): This is the on/off button.

Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation

The automatic dimming mirror comes on each time the ignition is turned to start. To turn the automatic dimming feature off or back on, press the on/off button. The indicator light on the mirror is lit when the automatic dimming feature is on.

Compass Operation

Press the on/off button once to turn the compass on or off.

There is a compass display in the window in the upper right corner of the mirror face.

Compass Calibration

Press and hold the on/off button to activate the compass calibration mode. CAL will be displayed in the compass window on the mirror.

The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a direction.

If after a few seconds the display does not show a compass direction, (N for North for example), there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass. Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, note pad holder, or similar object. If the letter C or CAL appears in the compass window, the compass may need to be reset or calibrated.

Compass Variance

Compass variance is the difference between earth's magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if you live outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances, such as during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance. If not adjusted to account for compass variance, your compass could give false readings.

To adjust for compass variance:

1. Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map.

1. Press and hold the on/off button until the zone number is displayed. The number shown is the current zone number.

2. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in the window on the mirror by pressing the on/off button. Once you find your zone number, release the button. After about four seconds, the mirror will return to the compass display, and the new zone number will be set. If C or CAL appears in the compass window, the compass may need calibration. See "Compass Calibration" listed previously.

Outside Power Mirrors

If your vehicle is equipped with outside power mirrors, the controls are located on the driver's door armrest.

Press (A) to select the driver's side mirror or (B) to select the passenger's side mirror. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror.

To adjust each mirror, press one of the four arrows located on the control pad to move the mirror in the direction you want it to go. Adjust each outside mirror so that you can see a little of your vehicle, and the area behind your vehicle. See MemorySeatandMirrorsonpage13for more information.

The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return the mirror to its original position, push outward. Be sure to return both mirrors to their original unfolded position before driving.

The use of hood-mounted air deflectors and add-on convex mirror attachments may adversely affect mirror performance.

Turn Signal Indicator

Your vehicle may have a turn signal indicator on the mirror. An arrow on the mirror will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change.

Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors

If your vehicle is equipped with outside power foldaway mirrors, the controls are located on the driver's door armrest.

• Press (A) to select the driver's side mirror. Then press the arrows located on the four-way control pad to adjust the mirror. Press (A) again to deselect the mirror.
• Press (B) to select the passenger's side mirror. Then press the arrows located on the four-way control pad to adjust the mirror. Press (B) again to deselect the mirror.
• Press (C), to fold the mirrors out to the driving position.
• Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded position.

If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded manually, they may shake or flutter at normal driving speeds and may not stay in the unfolded position. If this happens, you will need to reset the mirrors. See “Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors” next.

Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors

You will need to reset the power foldaway mirrors if the following occurs:

• The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while folding.
  • They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving speeds.

To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold and unfold them one time using the mirror controls. This will reset them to their normal position.

This mirror has the following features.

Automatic Dimming

The driver's outside mirror will adjust for the glare of the headlamps behind you. See Automatic DimmingRearviewMirrorwithOnStar ^ and Compassonpage139.

Curb View Assist

If your vehicle has the memory package, the outside mirrors are able to perform the curb view assist mirror function. This feature may be useful in allowing the driver to view the curb when parallel parking. This feature will cause the passenger's and/or driver's mirror to tilt to a preselected position when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R).

The passenger's and/or driver's mirror will return to its original position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R), or the ignition is turned off or to LOCK.

This feature can be turned on or off through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver InformationCenter(DIC)onpage228and Memory SeatandMirrorsonpage13for more information.

Turn Signal Indicator

Your vehicle may have a turn signal indicator on the mirror. An arrow on the mirror will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change.

Outside Convex Mirror

CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

The passenger's side mirror may have convex glass. A convex mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver's seat.

Outside Heated Mirrors

Press the rear window defogger button, located on the climate control panel, to also turn the outside heated mirrors on or off. The mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror.

See "Rear Window Defogger" under Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 198 for more information.

OnStar® System

graph LR
    A["Phone Icon"] --> B["Payment Icon"]
    B --> C["Medical Cross Icon"]

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and live advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety, security, information, and convenience services. If your airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic call to OnStar® Emergency advisors who can request emergency

services be sent to your location. If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar ^® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press the OnStar ^® button and they can contact Roadside Service for you.

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to the OnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your OnStar® service at any time by contacting OnStar®. A complete OnStar® Owner's Guide and the OnStar® Terms and Conditions are included in the vehicle's OnStar® Subscriber glove box literature. For more information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar® button to speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar ^® features are available on all vehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the services described below, or for a full description of OnStar ^® services and system limitations, see the OnStar ^® Owner's Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar® Services

For new vehicles with OnStar ^® , the Safe & Sound Plan, or the Directions & Connections ^® Plan is included for one year from the date of purchase. You can extend this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the Directions & Connections ^® Plan. For more information, press the OnStar ^® button to speak with an advisor. Some OnStar ^® services (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be available until you register with OnStar ^® .

Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan

• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
- Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN) (If equipped)
- Link to Emergency Services
- Roadside Assistance
- Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
- AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar ^ Vehicle Diagnostics
  • GM Goodwrench ^® On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar ^® Hands-Free Calling with 30 complimentary minutes
• OnStar ^® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

Available Services included with Directions & Connections® Plan

• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
- Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
- RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free Calling

OnStar ^® Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar ^® subscribers to make and receive calls using voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar ^® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.

Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar ^® Owner's Guide in the vehicle's glove box, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar ^® advisor by pressing the OnStar ^® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual Advisor

OnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access location-based weather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phone button and giving a few simple voice commands, you can browse through the various topics. See the OnStar® Owner's Guide for more information (Only available in the continental U.S.).

OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls

Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be used to interact with OnStar ^® Hands-Free Calling. See AudioSteeringWheelControlson page317 for more information. On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button for a few seconds and give the command "ONSTAR" in order to activate the OnStar® Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone extensions. See the OnStar ^® Owner's Guide for more information.

How OnStar® Service Works

In order to provide you with OnStar ^® services, your vehicle's OnStar ^® system has the capability of recording and transmitting vehicle information. This information is automatically sent to an OnStar ^® Call Center at the time of an OnStar ^® button press, Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicle information usually includes your GPS location and, in the event of a crash, additional information regarding the accident that your vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the direction from which your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar ^® Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle also sends OnStar ^® your GPS location so that we can provide you with location-based services.

OnStar ^® service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a place where OnStar ^® has an agreement with a wireless service provider for service in that area. OnStar ^® service also cannot work unless you are in a place where the wireless service provider OnStar ^® has hired for that area has coverage, network capacity and reception when the service is needed, and technology that is compatible with the OnStar ^® service. Not all services are available everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas, or at all times.

OnStar ^® service that involves location information about your vehicle cannot work unless GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and available in that place as well.

Your vehicle must have a working electrical system (including adequate battery power) for the OnStar ^® equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar ^® cannot control that may prevent OnStar ^® from providing OnStar ^® service to you at any particular time or place. Some examples are damage to important parts of your vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or wireless phone network congestion.

Your Responsibility

You may need to increase the volume of your radio to hear the OnStar ^® advisor. If the light next to the OnStar ^® buttons is red, this means that your system is not functioning properly and should be checked by your dealer/retailer. If the light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar ^® subscription has expired. You can always press the OnStar ^® button to confirm that your OnStar ^® equipment is active.

Universal Home Remote System

System Identification

Your vehicle may have a Universal Home Remote System.

Determine which Universal Home Remote your vehicle has and then read the pages following for instructions on programming your specific system.

Three simple line drawings of containers with dots and a triangle, no text or symbols present

If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator light above the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions under Universal Home Remote System Operation (With One Triangular LED).

Three identical line drawings of a container with handles and dots, no text or symbols present

If there are three round LED indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions under Universal Home Remote System Operation (With Three Round LED).

For help or information on the Universal Home Remote System, call the customer assistance phone number under CustomerAssistanceOffices onpage508.

Universal Home Remote System

The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home lighting.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.

Universal Home Remote System Operation (With One Triangular LED)

Three identical rounded rectangular objects with black dots and horizontal lines, arranged horizontally (no text or symbols)

If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator light above the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.

Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer garage door opener with rolling codes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete the programming of your Universal Home Remote Transmitter.

Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Universal Home Remote. Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in the programming steps

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote programming. It is also recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed Universal Home Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes. See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in section.

When programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside of the garage. Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate operator you are programming.

It is recommended that a new battery be installed in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

Programming the Universal Home Remote System

To program up to three devices:

1. Press and hold down the two outside Universal Home Remote buttons, releasing only when the Universal Home Remote indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program a second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons.

2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitter about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.

3. At the same time, press and hold both the desired Universal Home Remote button and the hand-held transmitter button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4 has been completed.

Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure noted in "Gate Operator and Canadian Programming" later in this section.

1. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons.
2. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home Remote button and observe the indicator light.

If the indicator light stays on continuously, programming is complete and your device should activate when the Universal Home Remote button is pressed and released.

To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under "Programming Universal Home Remote." Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the programmed channels.

If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the programming of a rolling-code device, most commonly, a garage door opener.

1. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the "Learn" or "Smart" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.
2. Firmly press and release the "Learn" or "Smart" button. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
3. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the programmed Universal Home Remote button for two seconds, then release it. Immediately press and hold the same button a second time for two seconds, then release it. Immediately, press and hold the same button a third time for two seconds, then release.

The Universal Home Remote should now activate the rolling-code device.

To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of "Programming Universal Home Remote." Do not repeat Step 1, as this will erase all previous programming from the Universal Home Remote buttons.

Gate Operator and Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming. Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to time out in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the “Programming Universal Home Remote” procedures, regardless of where you live, replace Step 3 under “Programming Universal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote button while you press and release every two seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly. Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal Home Remote” to complete.

Using Universal Home Remote

Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote button for at least half of a second. The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons

To erase programming from the three Universal Home Remote buttons:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in the training (learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2 under “Programming Universal Home Remote” shown earlier in this section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single Universal Home Remote Button” following this section.

Reprogramming a Single Universal Home Remote Button

To program a device to Universal Home Remote using a Universal Home Remote button previously trained:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home Remote button. Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. While still holding the Universal Home Remote button, proceed with Step 2 under "Programming Universal Home Remote" shown earlier in this section.

For help or information on the Universal Home Remote System, call the customer assistance phone number under CustomerAssistanceOffices onpage508.

Universal Home Remote System Operation (With Three Round LED)

Three identical simple illustrations of containers with dots above them, no text or symbols present

Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.

This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home automation devices.

Do not use this system with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in programming the transmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future programming. You only need the original remote control transmitter for Fixed Code programming. It is also recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle, the programmed buttons should be erased for security purposes. See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.

When programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside of the garage. Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or security device you are programming.

Programming Universal Home Remote — Rolling Code

Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling Code units. Programming a garage door opener involves time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure before you begin. If you do not follow these actions, the device will time out and you will have to repeat the procedure.

To program up to three devices:

Line drawing of two fingers holding circular buttons with dots above (no text or symbols)

1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside buttons at the same time for one to two seconds, and immediately release them.

1. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the "Learn" or "Smart" button. It can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit and may be a colored button. Press this button. After you press this button, you will have 30 seconds to complete the following steps.

2. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press and hold the universal home remote button that you would like to use to control the garage door until the garage door moves. The indicator light, above the selected button, should slowly blink. You may need to hold the button from five to 20 seconds.

3. Immediately, within one second, release the button when the garage door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete.

4. Press and release the same button again. The garage door should move, confirming that programming is successful and complete.

To program another Rolling Code device such as an additional garage door opener, a security device, or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5, choosing a different function button in Step 3 than what you used for the garage door opener.

If these instructions do not work, you probably have a Fixed Code garage door opener. Follow the Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code garage door opener.

Programming Universal Home Remote — Fixed Code

Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed Code units.

Programming a garage door opener involves time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure before you begin. If you do not follow these actions, the device will time out and you will have to repeat the procedure.

To program up to three devices:

1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garage door opener, remove the battery cover on your hand held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of your garage door opener motor. If you see a row of dip switches similar to the graphic above, you have a Fixed Code garage door opener. If you do not see a row of dip switches, return to the previous section for Programming Universal Home Remote – Rolling Code.

Switch Number	1	2	3	4	5	6	7	8
Switch Position	On	On	Off	On	Off	On	Off	Off
Your Universal Home Remote Button	Left	Left	Right	Left	Right	Left	Right	Right

Switch Number	1	2	3	4	5	6	7	8
Switch Position	On	On	Neutral	Neutral	Off	Off	Off	Off
Your Universal Home Remote Button	Left	Left	Middle	Middle	Right	Right	Right	Right

Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions

Your panel of switches may not appear exactly as they do in the examples above, but they should be similar.

The switch positions on your hand-held transmitter may be labeled, as follows:

• A switch in the up position may be labeled as "Up," "+," or "On."
• A switch in the down position may be labeled as "Down," “−,” or "Off."

• A switch in the middle position may be labeled as "Middle," "0," or "Neutral."

• Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left to right as follows:

• When a switch is in the up position, write "Left."

• When a switch is in the down position, write "Right."
• If a switch is set between the up and down position, write "Middle."

The switch settings that you wrote down in Step 2 will now become the button strokes you enter into the Universal Home Remote in Step 4. Be sure to enter the switch settings that you wrote down in Step 2, in order from left to right, into the Universal Home Remote, when completing Step 4.

1. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three buttons at the same time for about three seconds. Release the buttons to put the Universal Home Remote into programming mode.

1. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle's Universal Home Remote. You will have two and one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now press one button on the Universal Home Remote for each switch setting as follows:

2. If you wrote "Left," press the left button in the vehicle.

3. If you wrote "Right," press the right button in the vehicle.

4. If you wrote "Middle," press the middle button in the vehicle.

5. After entering all of the switch positions, again, firmly press and release all three buttons at the same time. The indicator lights will turn on.

6. Press and hold the button you would like to use to control the garage door until the garage door moves. The indicator light above the selected button should slowly blink. You may need to hold the button from five to 55 seconds.
7. Immediately release the button when the garage door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
8. Press and release the same button again. The garage door should move, confirming that programming is successful and complete.

To program another Fixed Code device such as an additional garage door opener, a security device, or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing a different button in Step 6 than what you used for the garage door opener.

Using Universal Home Remote

Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of a second. The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming Universal Home Remote Buttons

You can reprogram any of the three buttons by repeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons

You should erase the programmed buttons when you sell or terminate your lease.

To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the Universal Home Remote device:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same time for approximately 20 seconds, until the indicator lights, located directly above the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.

For help or information on the Universal Home Remote System, call the customer assistance phone number under CustomerAssistanceOffices onpage508.

Storage Areas

Glove Box

To open, lift the handle up. Use the key to lock and unlock.

Cupholder(s)

There are two cupholders, with removable liners, located in front of the center console. There are cupholders located in the second row seat armrest. To access, pull the armrest down. There are additional cupholders located on each side of the third row seat and in each door. There are cupholders located behind the center console. To access, pull down on the handle.

Instrument Panel Storage Area

Your vehicle has an instrument panel storage area located above the radio. To open the cover, press the button.

Center Console Storage Area

Line drawing of a car frontrest lever mechanism (no text or symbols)

The armrest on the center console can slide forwards and backwards by holding up the lever located on the front of it. To open the armrest storage area, press the button located on the front of the armrest. There is additional storage under the armrest. Move the armrest all the way to the rear position. The tray can be removed for additional storage.

Floor Mats

There is a grommet in the driver side floor mat that attaches to a hook on the floor of the vehicle. This allows the mat to remain in position under your feet and out of reach of the accelerator and brake pedal. To remove the floor mat, pull the mat towards the rear of the vehicle until the grommet can be removed from the hook.

Make sure that the driver side floor mat is properly placed on the floor so that it does not block the movement of the accelerator and brake pedal.

Luggage Carrier

CAUTION:

If you try to carry something on top of your vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress and so forth — the wind can catch it as you drive along. This can cause you to lose control. What you are carrying could be violently torn off, and this could cause you or other drivers to have a collision, and of course damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry something like this inside. But, never carry something longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top of your vehicle.

If you have the luggage carrier, you can load things on top of your vehicle. Crossrails are not standard on this vehicle and must be purchased at your dealer/retailer.

Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests as far forward as possible and against the side rails, making sure to fasten it securely.

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle capacity and loading, see LoadingYour Vehicleonpage353.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving, check to make sure the cargo is still securely fastened.

Rear Seat Armrest

Your vehicle may have a rear seat armrest that contains two cupholders. To access the cupholders, pull the armrest down from the rear seatback.

Convenience Net

Your vehicle may have a convenience net. The convenience net is designed to help keep small loads, like grocery bags, from falling over. It is not designed to hold larger, heavier loads. To install the convenience net, attach both the upper and lower hooks to the loops on either side of the liftgate opening.

Cargo Cover

Your vehicle may have a cargo cover. It can be used to cover items in the rear of the vehicle. To install the cover, place the loops found on each corner of the cover on the four hooks in the rear of the vehicle. When not in use, the cover can be stored in the cargo management system.

Cargo Tie Downs

Your vehicle has eight cargo tie-downs located in the rear of the vehicle. These are used to secure small loads.

Cargo Management System

Your vehicle has a cargo management system located in the rear of the vehicle. To open, pull the handle toward the rear of the vehicle and lift the cover up.

Line drawing of a vehicle interior showing the dashboard and seat area (no text or symbols)

There is an additional storage compartment on each side of the system. To open, unsnap and lift the panel up.

To remove the cargo management system:

1. Open the lid.
2. Remove the side panels and place inside the bin.
3. Loosen the retaining nuts on each side of the system by turning them counterclockwise.
4. Close the lid.
5. Pull up on the system by using the built in handles and remove it from the vehicle.

Sunroof

The vehicle may have a sunroof over the front seats, and a rear sunroof over the second row seats. The rear sunroof does not open. The switches to operate the front sunroof and rear sunshade are located on the headliner above the rearview mirror. The ignition must be in ON or ACCESSORY to operate the sunroof. See Ignition Positionsonpage124.

Vent: From the closed position, press and hold the front of the driver's side switch to vent the sunroof. Press and hold the rear of the driver's side switch to close the sunroof.

Express-open/Express-close: From the closed position, press and release the rear of the driver's side switch to express-open the sunroof. Press and release the front of the driver's side switch to express-close the sunroof.

The front sunshade must be opened and closed manually. Push up on the sunshade handle to open the sunshade.

Notice: The rear sunshade could be damaged if you attempt to open or close it manually. Do not manually open or close the rear sunshade.

To open the rear sunshade, located over the second row seats, press and release the rear of the passenger's side switch. Press and release the front of the switch to close the sunshade.

NOTES

Section 3 Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview 170

Hazard Warning Flashers 172

Other Warning Devices 172

Horn 172

Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel 172

Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column 173

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever 174

Turn and Lane-Change Signals 174

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer 175

Flash-to-Pass 176

Windshield Wipers 176

Windshield Washer 177

Rear Window Wiper/Washer 178

Cruise Control 179

Exterior Lamps 182

Delayed Headlamps 183

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/ Automatic Headlamp System .... 183

Fog Lamps 184

Instrument Panel Brightness 184

Courtesy Lamps 184

Dome Lamps 185

Dome Lamp Override 185

Entry Lighting 185

Delayed Entry Lighting 186

Delayed Exit Lighting 186

Parade Dimming 186

Reading Lamps 187

Electric Power Management 187

Battery Run-Down Protection 188

Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ..... 188

Accessory Power Outlet(s) 192

Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current 193

Climate Controls 194

Climate Control System 194

Dual Automatic Climate Control System ..... 198

Outlet Adjustment 205

Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System 206

Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls .... 207

Section 3 Instrument Panel

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 209

Instrument Panel Cluster 210

Speedometer and Odometer 211

Tachometer 211

Safety Belt Reminder Light 211

Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ..... 212

Airbag Readiness Light 212

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 214

Charging System Light 216

Voltmeter Gage 216

Brake System Warning Light 217

Antilock Brake System Warning Light ..... 218

StabiliTrak® Indicator Light 219

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light 220

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage 220

Tire Pressure Light 221

Malfunction Indicator Lamp 222

Oil Pressure Light 225

Security Light 226

Fog Lamp Light 226

Cruise Control Light 226

Highbeam On Light 227

Tow/Haul Mode Light 227

Fuel Gage 227

Driver Information Center (DIC) 228

DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) 229

DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) 235

DIC Warnings and Messages 239

DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) 250

Section 3 Instrument Panel

Audio System(s) 260

Setting the Time 261

Radio with CD 263

Radio with CD and DVD 273

Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or Six-Disc CD Player) 290

Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and DVD Player) 296

XM Radio Messages 303

Navigation/Radio System 305

Rear Seat Entertainment System 305

Rear Seat Audio (RSA) 315

Theft-Deterrent Feature 317

Audio Steering Wheel Controls 317

Radio Reception 318

Care of Your CDs and DVDs 320

Care of the CD and DVD Player 320

Multi-Band Antenna 320

Instrument Panel Overview

The main components of your instrument panel are listed here:

A. Air Vent. See OutletAdjustmentonpage205.

B. Multifunction Lever. See Turn Signal/MultifunctionLeveronpage174. Windshield Wipers. See Turn Signal/MultifunctionLeveronpage174.

C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See InstrumentPanel Clusteronpage210.

D. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See DriverInformationCenter(DIC)onpage228.

E. Storage Area. See InstrumentPanelStorageAreaonpage161.

F. Audio System. See AudioSystem(s) on page260. Navigation/Radio System (If Equipped). See Navigation/RadioSystem onpage305.

G. Exterior Lamps Control. See ExteriorLamps onpage182.

H. Hood Release. See HoodReleaseon page385.

I. Dome Lamp Override Button. See DomeLamp Overrideonpage185. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See InstrumentPanel Brightnessonpage184.

J. Cruise Control Buttons. See CruiseControl onpage179.

K. Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel. See Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel on page 172. Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering (If Equipped). See Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column on page 173.

L. Horn. See Hornonpage172.

M. Audio Steering Wheel Control Buttons. See AudioSteeringWheelControlsonpage317.

N. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See HazardWarningFlashersonpage172.

O. Center Console Shift Lever. See "Console Shift Lever" under ShiftingIntoPark(P)on page134.

P. Traction Control System (TCS) Disable Button (If Equipped). See StabiliTrak® Systemon page329. Tow/Haul Selector Button (If Equipped). See Tow/HaulModeon page132. Power Liftgate Button (If Equipped). See PowerLiftgateonpage110.

Q. Accessory Power Outlets. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s)onpage192.

R. Heated Seats Button. See HeatedSeatson page12.
S. Dual Automatic Climate Controls. See Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 198.
T. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator. See PassengerSensingSystemonpage86.
U. Glove Box. See GloveBoxonpage161.

Hazard Warning Flashers

The hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. The front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

Simple geometric diagram of two nested triangles (no text or symbols)

The hazard warning flasher button is located in the center of the instrument panel, below the audio system.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter what position the key is in, and even if the key is not in the ignition.

Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn signals will not work.

Other Warning Devices

If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.

Horn

Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering wheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel

A tilt and telescope wheel lets you adjust the steering wheel before you drive. The steering wheel can be raised to the highest level to give your legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle.

The lever that lets you tilt and telescope the steering wheel is located on the left side of the steering column.

Line drawing of a car interior showing a mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

To tilt and telescope the steering wheel, pull down the lever. Then move the steering wheel up or down or backward or forward into a comfortable position. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the tilt and telescope lever while driving.

Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column

Simple line drawing of a square electrical socket with three pins, connected to wires (no text or symbols)

If your vehicle has this feature, the power tilt wheel control is located on the left side of the steering column.

To operate the power tilt feature, push the control up and the steering wheel will tilt up. Push the control down and the steering wheel will go down. Push the control forward and the steering wheel moves toward the front of the vehicle. Push the control rearward and the steering wheel moves toward the rear of the vehicle.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following:

• Turn and Lane Change Signals. See TurnandLane-ChangeSignalsonpage174.
• 📋 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See HeadlampHigh/Low-BeamChangeron page175.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Passon page176.

• Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipersonpage176.

• 🍴 ▲ Windshield Washer. See Windshield Washeronpage177.

• Rear Wiper/Washer. See Rear Window Wiper/Washeronpage178.

For information on the headlamps, see Exterior Lampsonpage182.

Turn and Lane-Change Signals

The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically.

Two black arrows pointing in opposite directions on a white background (no text or symbols)

An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself when you release it. If you momentarily press and release the lever, the turn signal will flash three times.

If the arrow flashes faster than normal as you signal a turn or a lane change, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers will not see your turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check the fuse. See FusesandCircuit Breakersonpage476.

Turn Signal On Chime

If you leave either one of your turn signals on and drive more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound to alert you.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam, push the turn signal/multifunction lever toward the front of the vehicle.

Simple black-and-white icon of a light bulb with three parallel lines, no text or symbols present.

This light on the instrument panel cluster comes on if the high beam lamps are turned on while the ignition is on.

To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam, pull the turn signal lever toward the rear of the vehicle.

Flash-to-Pass

With the turn signal lever in the low-beam position, pull the lever toward you momentarily to switch to high-beam (to signal that you are going to pass).

If the headlamps are on, they will return to low-beam when the lever is released.

This feature operates even when the headlamps are off.

Windshield Wipers

Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield, gently loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades may not clear the windshield well, making it harder to see and drive safely. If the blades do become damaged, install new blades or blade inserts. For more information, see Windshield WiperBladeReplacementonpage424.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload. Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the windshield wipers.

(Mist): Turn the band to mist for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. The wipers stop after one wipe. Hold the band on mist longer, for more wipe cycles.

○ (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.

(Delay): Turn the band to adjust the delay time. The delay between wiping cycles becomes shorter as the band is moved to the top of the lever. This can be very useful in light rain or snow.

(Low Speed): Turn the band away from you to the first solid band past the delay settings, for steady wiping at low speed.

(High Speed): Turn the band further, to the second solid band past the delay settings, for high-speed wiping.

Windshield Washer

(Washer Fluid): Press and release this paddle, located at the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever, to spray washer fluid on the windshield. The wipers clear the windshield and either stop or return to the preset speed. The ignition key must be in ACCESSORY or ON for this to work. See WindshieldWasherFluid onpage409Windshield Washer Fluid.

CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID is displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the washer fluid is low. See DICWarningsand Messagesonpage239.

Heated Windshield Washer

If your vehicle has the heated windshield washer fluid system it can be used to help clear ice, snow, tree sap, or bugs from the windshield. This feature only works with the front wiper system, not the rear wiper system.

Simple line drawing of a fan with three upward arrows and two dashed arcs above it (no text or symbols)

The button is located to the left of the steering column on the instrument panel.

Push the heated washer fluid button to activate the heated windshield washer fluid system. This activation begins four heated wash/wipe cycles. The first heated wash/wipe cycle can take up to 40 seconds to occur, depending on outside temperature. After the first wash/wipe cycle, it can take up to 20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles. Press the button again to turn off the heated windshield washer fluid system or it will automatically turn off after four wipe cycles have been completed.

When the heated windshield washer fluid system is activated under certain outside temperature conditions, steam might flow out of the washer nozzles for a short period of time before washer fluid is sprayed. This is a normal condition.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID is displayed on the DIC when the washer fluid is low. See DIC WarningsandMessagesonpage239.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision.

The rear wiper control is located on the turn signal/multifunction lever.

To turn the rear wiper on, slide the lever to a wiper position.

○ (Off): Slide the lever to this setting to turn the wiper off.

(Rear Wiper Delay): Slide the lever to this setting to turn on the rear wiper delay.

(Rear Wiper): Slide the lever to this setting to turn on the rear wiper.

(Rear Wiper Wash): Push the button on the end of the turn signal/multifunction lever to spray washer fluid on the rear window. The wipers will clear the rear window and either stop or return to your preset speed. For more washer cycles, press and hold the button.

Cruise Control

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

When you apply your brakes, cruise control is turned off.

CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.

The cruise control buttons are located on left side of the steering wheel.

(On/Off): Press this button to turn cruise control on and off. The indicator comes on when cruise control is on.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this button to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.

SET-: Press this button to set the speed or make the vehicle decelerate.

☒ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruise control.

Setting Cruise Control

Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low. The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster comes on after the cruise control has been set to the desired speed.

CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control.

1. Press the cruise control on/off button.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
3. Press and release the SET– button located on the steering wheel.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.

Resuming a Set Speed

Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake. This shuts off the cruise control. But you do not need to reset it.

Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, press the +RES button on your steering wheel. The vehicle will go back to the previously chosen speed and stay there.

Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control

To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:

• Press and hold the +RES button on the steering wheel until you reach the desired speed, then release it.
• To increase vehicle speed in small increments, press the +RES button.

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control

To reduce your speed while using cruise control:

• Press and hold the SET– button on the steering wheel until you reach the lower speed desired, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press the SET– button on the steering wheel briefly. Each time this is done, the vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal to increase vehicle speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the previously set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down. Of course, applying the brake turns off the cruise control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Press the Ⓧ (cancel) button on the steering wheel.
• Press the 🎨- (on/off) button on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed memory is erased by turning off the cruise control or the ignition.

Exterior Lamps

The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.

It controls the following systems:

• Headlamps
• Taillamps
• Parking Lamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Fog Lamps (if equipped)

The exterior lamps control has four positions:

(Off): Briefly turn the control to this position to turn off the automatic light control. Briefly turn to this position again to turn automatic light control on again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to automatically turn on the headlamps at normal brightness, together with the following:

• Parking Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights

-00: (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position to turn on the parking lamps together with the following:

• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights

ID (Headlamps): Turn the control to this position to turn on the headlamps together with the following lamps listed below. A warning chime will sound if you open the driver's door when the ignition switch is off and the headlamps are on.

• Parking Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights

∅ (Fog Lamps) (If your vehicle has them): Push the fog lamps control in to turn on the fog lamps.

See FogLampsonpage184.

Delayed Headlamps

The delayed headlamps feature provides a period of exterior lighting as you leave the area around your vehicle. The feature is activated when the headlamps are on due to the automatic headlamps control feature described previously in this section, and when the ignition is turned off. Your headlamps will then remain on until the exterior lamps control is moved to the parking lamps position or until the pre-selected delayed headlamp lighting period has ended.

If you turn off the ignition with the headlamps switch in the parking lamps or headlamps position, the delayed headlamps cycle will not occur.

To disable the delayed headlamps feature or change the time of delay, see DICVehicle Customization(WithDICButtons)onpage250.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/Automatic Headlamp System

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the DRL work, so be sure it is not covered.

The DRL system's automatic headlamp control will make the low-beam headlamps come on at a reduced brightness when the following conditions are met:

• The ignition is in the ON position.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
  • The engine is running.

When the DRL are on, only the low-beam headlamps, at a reduced level of brightness, will be on. The headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker, and other lamps will not be on. The instrument panel and cluster will also not be lit.

When it is dark enough outside, the low-beam headlamps will turn off and the headlamps and parking lamps will turn on. The other lamps that come on with the headlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will go off and the DRL will come on.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when it is needed.

Fog Lamps

∅ (Fog Lamps): If your vehicle has fog lamps, the control is located on the exterior lamps control. The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column.

The ignition must be in the ON position for the fog lamps to come on.

To turn the fog lamps on, press the exterior lamps button. A light will come on in the instrument panel cluster. Press the exterior lamps button again to turn the fog lamps off.

When the headlamps are changed to high-beam, the fog lamps also go off.

Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Instrument Panel Brightness

(Instrument Panel Brightness): The knob with this symbol on it is located next to the exterior lamps control. Push the knob in all the way until it extends out and then turn the knob clockwise to brighten or counterclockwise to dim the lights. Push the knob back in when finished.

Courtesy Lamps

When a door is opened, the courtesy lamps automatically come on. They make it easy for you to enter and leave your vehicle. You can also manually turn these lamps on by fully turning the instrument panel brightness control clockwise.

The reading lamps, located on the headliner above the rearview mirror, can be turned on or off independent of the automatic courtesy lamps, when the doors are closed.

Dome Lamps

The dome lamps automatically come on when a door is opened, unless the dome lamp override button is pressed in.

The lamps can also be turned on by turning the instrument panel brightness control clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the dome lamps will remain on until they are turned off.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button is located next to the exterior lamps control.

The dome lamp override is used to set the dome lamps to remain off or come on automatically when a door is opened.

(Dome Lamp Override): Press the button in and the dome lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press the button again to return it to the extended position so that the dome lamps come on when a door is opened.

Entry Lighting

Your vehicle may have courtesy lamps that will come on and stay on for a set time whenever the unlock symbol is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter, if the vehicle has one.

If a door is opened, the lamps will stay on while it is open and then turn off automatically about 25 seconds after the door is closed. If the unlock symbol is pressed and you do not open a door, the lamps will turn off after about 20 seconds.

Entry lighting includes a feature called theater dimming. With theater dimming, the lamps do not turn off at the end of the delay time. Instead, they slowly dim after the delay time until they go out. The delay time is canceled if you turn the ignition key to ON or press the power door lock switch. The lamps will dim right away.

When the ignition is on, illuminated entry is inactive, which means the courtesy lamps will not come on unless a door is opened.

Delayed Entry Lighting

Delayed entry lighting illuminates the interior for a period of time after all the doors have been closed.

The ignition must be off for delayed entry lighting to work. Immediately after all the doors have been closed, the delayed entry lighting feature will continue to work until one of the following occurs:

• The ignition is in ON.
  • The doors are locked.
• An illumination period of 25 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination period a door is opened, the timed illumination period will be canceled and the interior lamps will remain on because a door is open.

Delayed Exit Lighting

This feature illuminates the interior for a period of time after the key is removed from the ignition.

The ignition must be off for delayed exit lighting to work. When the key is removed, interior illumination will activate and remain on until one of the following occurs:

• The ignition is in ON.
- The power door locks are activated.
- An illumination period of 20 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination period a door is opened, the timed illumination period will be canceled and the interior lamps will remain on because a door is open.

Parade Dimming

The instrument panel has an added feature called parade mode. It automatically prohibits the dimming of the instrument panel displays during the daylight while the headlamps are on so that you will still be able to see the displays.

Reading Lamps

The vehicle has reading lamps that also act as the dome lamp. Press the button to turn them on and off.

Electric Power Management

The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that estimates the battery's temperature and state of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery.

When the battery's state of charge is low, the voltage is raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in. When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of the following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery. It does this by balancing the generator's output and the vehicle's electrical needs. It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message might be displayed, such as Battery Saver Active or Service Battery Charging System. If this message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See DICWarningsandMessagesonpage239.

Battery Run-Down Protection

This vehicle has a feature to help prevent the battery from being drained, if the interior courtesy lamps, reading/map lamps, visor vanity lamps or trunk lamp are accidentally left on. If any of these lamps are left on, they will automatically turn off after 10 minutes, if the ignition is off. The lamps will not come back on again until one of the following occurs:

• The ignition is turned on.
- The exterior lamps control is turned off, then on again.

The headlamps will timeout after 10 minutes, if they are manually turned on before the ignition is off.

Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)

If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system it is designed to help you park while in Reverse (R). It operates only at speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h). URPA helps make parking easier and helps you avoid colliding with objects such as parked vehicles. The URPA system detects objects that are close to the rear of the vehicle which are at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the ground and below hood or trunk level. The system detects objects up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behind your vehicle. The URPA sensors determine how close these objects are from your bumper within this area.

CAUTION:

The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URPA) system does not replace driver vision. URPA does not:

• Operate above speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Detect objects more than 8 feet (2.5 meters) behind the vehicle. This distance may be less during warmer or humid weather.
• Detect objects that are below the bumper, underneath the vehicle, or that are very close to the vehicle.
• Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.

So if you do not use proper care before backing up, you could hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian, bicyclist, or pet, resulting in vehicle damage, injury, or death. Even though the vehicle has the URPA system, always check carefully before backing up by checking behind your vehicle.

The URPA display is located in the headliner and can be seen by looking over your right shoulder.

The URPA display has three color-coded lights. The lights are used to provide distance and system information, along with beeps that will be heard through the speakers.

If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), and PARK ASSIST OFF has been selected, then the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R), PARK ASSIST OFF will display on the DIC and one red light in the URPA display will be lit. See DICWarningsandMessagesonpage239for more information.

URPA automatically turns back on each time the vehicle is started.

How the System Works

When the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R), the rear display will briefly come on to let you know the display is operating correctly. URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R).

The system does not work at a reverse speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). To remind you of this, the red light on the rear display will flash.

To disable URPA, see DICOperationandDisplays(WithDICButtons)onpage229or DICOperation andDisplays(WithoutDICButtons)onpage235 for more information.

How the System Works when Backing

If the shift lever is in REVERSE (R), URPA detects objects close to the rear bumper. The first time an object is detected a single beep will sound. If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 5 mph (8 km/h), the following describes what will occur based on your distance to a detected object located behind the vehicle:

- At distances between 40 inches (1 m) and 8 ft (2.5 m), a single amber light will come on.

- At distances between 23 inches (0.6 m) and 40 inches (1 m), both amber lights will be on.

- At distances between 12 inches (0.3 m) and 23 inches (0.6 m), all three lights (amber/amber/red) will be on.

- At distances less than 12 inches (0.3 m), a beeping sound will repeat for a short time and all three lights (amber/amber/red) will flash.

When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly

If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary condition, the message PARK ASSIST OFF will display on the DIC screen and a red

light will come on the URPA display when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R). This occurs under the following conditions:

• The parking brake pedal is depressed.

• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle or an object was hanging out of your trunk during your last drive when you turned off the vehicle. If the attached objects are removed from your vehicle before the start of your next drive, the system will return to normal operation unless an object is detected when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R). If this occurs, URPA assumes the object is still attached, so you will have to wait until the vehicle is driven forward above 15 mph (25 km/h) before URPA will return to normal operation.

• The ultrasonic sensors need to be kept clean. So, be sure to keep your vehicle's rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush. For cleaning instructions, see WashingYour Vehicleonpage468. If the DIC still displays the PARK ASSIST OFF message after cleaning the bumper and driving forward at a speed of at least 15 mph (25 km/h), see your dealer/retailer.

• Other conditions that may affect system performance include vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air brakes on a very large truck or other mechanical devices that interfere with URPA performance.

As always, drivers should use care when backing up a vehicle. Always look behind you, being sure to check for other vehicles, obstructions and blind spots.

If the vehicle bumper is damaged, the URPA system may not work properly. Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)

The accessory power outlets can be used to connect electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or CB radio.

Your vehicle may have four accessory power outlets. They are located on the instrument panel below the climate controls, inside the front center console storage bin, at the rear of the center console, and in the rear cargo area.

To use the outlets, remove the cover. When not in use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn off electrical equipment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.

Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with the accessory power outlets and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional information on the accessory power outlet.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your vehicle may damage it or keep other components from working as they should. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before adding electrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the installation instructions included with the equipment.

Notice:Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only.

Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current

Your vehicle may have a power outlet that can be used to plug in auxiliary electrical equipment with a maximum limit of 150 watts. If you try to use equipment that requires more than the limit, a protection circuit will cut the power supply. To reset the outlet, unplug the item and plug it back in or turn the ignition to LOCK or ACCESSORY and then back on. The power will automatically restart when equipment that operates within the limit is plugged into the outlet.

Line drawing of a portable electrical switch with two dials and a button (no text or symbols)

The power outlet is located on the rear of the center console.

The indicator on the inner outlet face will come on when 115 volt AC power is available. The AC power is available when the ignition is turned to ACCESSORY or ON, and electrical equipment is plugged into the outlet. The AC power is not available in the outlet when the ignition is turned to OFF.

The power outlet is not designed for the following electrical equipment and may not work properly if these items are plugged into the power outlet:

• Equipment with high initial peak wattage such as: compressor-driven refrigerators and electric power tools.
• Other equipment requiring an extremely stable power supply such as: microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.

See HighVoltageDevicesandWiringon page475.

Climate Controls

Climate Control System

With this system you can control the heating, cooling, defrost, defog, and ventilation of the vehicle.

Manual Operation

(Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the front system off.

Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature of the air flowing from the system.

Airflow Mode Control: Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to direct the airflow inside of the vehicle.

To change the current mode, select one of the following:

(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument panel outlets.

(Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of the air to the instrument panel outlets and half to the floor outlets. A little air is directed towards the windshield and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.

(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the floor outlets, with some of the air directed to the windshield, side window outlets, and second row floor outlets. In this mode, the system automatically selects outside air. Recirculation cannot be selected when in Floor Mode.

The right knob can also be used to select defog or defrost mode. For more information, see "Defogging and Defrosting" later in this section.

By positioning the right knob between two modes, a combination of those two modes is selected.

(Recirculation): Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or off. The indicator light on the button turns on when this mode is selected.

This mode keeps outside air from entering the vehicle. It can be used to reduce the outside air and odors entering the vehicle. Recirculation may also help cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly once the temperature inside the vehicle is less than the outside temperature.

The recirculation mode can be turned off in vent and bi-level modes by pressing the button again. Recirculation mode automatically turns off when the engine is turned off and must be re-selected when the engine is turned on again.

The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor, defrost, or defogging modes. If you try to select recirculation in one of those modes, the indicator flashes three times and turns off. The air conditioning compressor also comes on when this mode is activated unless the outside air temperature is less than 40^ F ( 4^ C). While in recirculation mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, select either the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed.

(Air Conditioning): Press this button on the left knob to turn the air conditioning system on or off. When A/C is pressed, an indicator light comes on to show that the air conditioning has been activated. The air conditioning compressor does not operate when outside temperatures fall below 40°F (4°C). The indicator light flashes three times and turns off when outside conditions affect air conditioning operation. This is normal.

For quicker cool down on hot days, do the following:

1. Open the windows to let hot air escape.
2. Select the vent mode.
3. Select the air conditioner.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
6. Close the windows after the hot air has escaped.
7. Once the vehicle's interior temperature is below the outside temperature, select recirculation mode for better cooling.

This helps to reduce the time it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.

Using recirculation for long periods of time may cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too dry. To prevent this from happening, after the inside of the vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.

The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air, so you might notice a small amount of water dripping underneath the front center and right rear of the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. This is normal.

Defogging and Defrosting

Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This can be minimized if the climate control system is used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost from the windshield. Turn the right knob clockwise to select the defog or defrost mode.

(Defog): The defog mode is used to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. This mode directs air to the windshield, floor outlets, and side window vents. When you select this mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is less than 40^ F ( 4^ C). The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

(Defrost): The defrost mode is used to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly. This mode directs most of the air to the windshield and side window vents and some to the floor vents. In this mode, the system will automatically force outside air into your vehicle. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defrost mode. The air conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting, unless the outside temperature is less than 40^ F ( 4^ C). Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to turn the rear heating and air conditioning on. See RearAir ConditioningandHeatingSystemonpage206or RearAirConditioningandHeatingSystemand ElectronicClimateControlsonpage207.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window.

(Rear Window Defogger): Press this button on the right knob to turn the rear window defogger on or off. The rear window defogger stays on about 10 minutes after the button is pressed, before turning off. The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors, the mirrors heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button is pressed.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar to the defogger grid.

Dual Automatic Climate Control System

With this system, you can control the heating, cooling, and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation system described later in this section.

You can select different temperature settings for the driver and all passengers.

Display Function

Each time the temperature, mode, or fan control buttons are pressed the display shows that function along with the inside temperature setting. The display automatically reverts back to the outside temperature display after a short delay.

Driver's Side Temperature Control

The driver side temperature buttons are used to adjust the temperature of the air coming through the system on the driver side. The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off. This is possible since outside air will always flow through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later in this section.

Press the + or – buttons to increase or decrease the temperature. The driver side temperature display will show the temperature setting decreasing or increasing.

Passenger's Side Temperature Control

The passenger's temperature buttons can be used to change the temperature of the air coming through the system on the passenger side of the vehicle. The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off. This is possible since outside air will always flow through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later in this section.

Press the + or – buttons to increase or decrease the temperature. The passenger side display will show the temperature setting decreasing or increasing.

The passenger's temperature setting can be set to match the driver's temperature setting by pressing the PASS button and turning off the PASS indicator. When the passenger's temperature setting is set different than the driver's setting, the indicator on the PASS button comes on and both the driver side and passenger side temperature displays are shown.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is active the system controls the inside temperature, the air delivery, and the fan speed.

Use the steps below to place the entire system in automatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.

When AUTO is selected, the display shows the current temperature(s) selected and AUTO is on the display. The current delivery mode and fan speed also display for approximately 5 seconds.

When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning operation and air inlet are automatically controlled. The air conditioning compressor runs when the outside temperature is over about 40^ F ( 4^ C). The air inlet is normally set to outside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet can automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help quickly cool down your vehicle. The light comes on the recirculation button while in recirculation.

1. Set the driver's and passenger's temperature.

To find your comfort setting, start with a 73°F (22.5°C) temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate. Use the driver's or passenger's temperature buttons to adjust the temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the temperature setting of 60°F (15°C), the system remains at the maximum cooling setting. If you choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C), the system remains at the maximum heat setting. Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.

Do not cover the solar sensor located on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor regulates air temperature based on sun load and also turns on your vehicle's headlamps. For more information on the solar sensor, see "Sensors" later in this section.

To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system delays turning on the fan until warm air is available. The length of delay depends on the engine coolant temperature. Press the fan switch to override this delay and change the fan to a selected speed.

(On/Off): Press this button to turn off the climate control system. Outside air still enters the vehicle, and is directed to the floor. This direction can be changed by pressing the mode button. Recirculation can only be selected in vent or bi-level mode. The temperature can also be adjusted using either temperature button. If you adjust the air delivery mode or temperature settings with the system off, the display comes on briefly to show the settings and then turns off. Press the on/off button or the up down arrows on the fan switch, the defrost button, AUTO button, or the air conditioning button to turn the system on when it is off.

Manual Operation

The air delivery mode or fan speed can be manually adjusted.

✿ (Fan): The buttons with the fan symbols let you manually adjust the fan speed. Press the up arrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed.

Pressing a fan button while the system is off will turn the system on. Pressing a fan button while in automatic control places the fan under manual control. The fan setting remains displayed and the AUTO button light turns off. The air delivery mode remains in automatic control.

∧ √ V (Mode): Press the mode up and down buttons to manually change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle. Repeatedly press the button until the desired mode appears on the display. Pressing a mode button while the system is off will change air delivery mode without turning the system on. Pressing one of these buttons while in automatic control to place the mode under manual control.

The air delivery mode setting displays and the AUTO button light turns off. The fan remains under automatic control.

(Vent): This setting delivers air to the instrument panel outlets.

(Bi-Level): This mode directs air to the instrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets. A little air is directed towards the windshield and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.

(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the floor outlets, with some of the air directed to the windshield, side window outlets, and second row floor outlets. In this mode, the system automatically selects outside air. Recirculation cannot be selected in floor mode.

(Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section.

(Recirculation): Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on. When the button is pressed, an indicator light comes on.

This mode keeps outside air from entering the vehicle. It can be used to reduce outside air and prevent odors from entering your vehicle. Recirculation also helps to quickly cool the warmer air inside your vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor, defrost, or defogging modes. If you try to select recirculation in one of those modes, the indicator flashes three times and turns off. The air conditioning compressor also comes on when this mode is activated. While in recirculation mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, select either the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed.

Press the button again to turn off the recirculation mode. It automatically turns off when the engine is turned off and must be re-selected when the engine is turned on again.

Air Conditioning

(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the air conditioning (A/C) compressor on and off. When air conditioning is selected, an indicator light comes on to let you know that the air conditioning has been activated.

The air conditioning compressor does not work when outside temperatures fall below 40^ F ( 4^ C). Pressing this button when the outside temperature is too cool makes the air conditioning indicator flash three times and turn off to let you know the air conditioning mode is not available. If the air conditioning is on and the outside temperature drops below a temperature which is too cool for air conditioning to be effective, the air conditioning light turns off to show that the air conditioning mode has been canceled.

On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape. This helps to reduce the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.

The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. This is normal.

Sensors

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille in the middle of the instrument panel, monitors the solar radiation. Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not work properly.

Line drawing of a car interior showing a door, seatbelt, and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

The interior temperature sensor located on the instrument panel to the right of the steering column, measures the temperature of the air inside the vehicle.

There is also an exterior temperature sensor located behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could cause a false reading in the displayed temperature.

The climate control system uses the information from these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and the air delivery mode. The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The recirculation mode will also be used as needed to maintain cool outlet temperatures.

Defogging and Defrosting

Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This can be minimized if the climate control system is used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost from your windshield.

Use the mode up and down arrows to select the defog mode. Use the defrost button to select the defrost mode.

(Defog): The defog mode is used to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. This mode directs air to the windshield, floor outlets, and side window vents.

When you select this mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is close to freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

(Defrost): Press this button to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly. This mode directs most of the air to the windshield and side window vents and some to the floor vents. In this mode, the system automatically forces outside air into your vehicle. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defrost mode. The air conditioning compressor runs automatically in this setting, unless the outside temperature is close to freezing. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to turn the rear heating and air conditioning on. See Rear Air ConditioningandHeatingSystemonpage206or RearAirConditioningandHeatingSystemand ElectronicClimateControlsonpage207.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window.

(Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to turn the rear window defogger on or off. The rear window defogger stays on for about 10 minutes after the button is pressed, before turning off. The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors, the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button is pressed.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass. These actions may damage the rear defogger. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.

Outlet Adjustment

Use the slider switch in the center of the outlet, to change the direction of the air flow. Use the thumbwheel near the outlet to control the amount of air flow or to shut off the airflow completely.

Keep all outlets open whenever possible for best system performance.

Operation Tips

• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air inlets at the base of the windshield that can block the flow of air into the vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under all seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside the vehicle more effectively.
• If fogging reoccurs while in vent or bi-level modes with mild temperature throughout the vehicle, turn on the air conditioner to reduce windshield fogging.

Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System

If your vehicle has this system, the rear controls are three knobs located on the rear of the center console. The system can be controlled from the front controls as well as the rear controls.

To turn the system on, press the AUX button on the front climate control system, an indicator will be lit. Pressing the AUX button the first time will turn the rear system on in a mimic mode. In this mode, the airflow in the rear will be approximately the same direction, temperature, and fan speed as the front. Pressing the AUX button again will turn the rear system and the indicator off.

If the rear controls are adjusted, the system turns on in a rear independent mode. Airflow in the rear will then be directed according to the settings of the rear controls. The rear system can be turned off by pressing the AUX button on the front climate control system and the indicator will turn off. The system can be turned back on, by adjusting any of the rear air conditioning control knobs.

Three circular gauges with curved arrows and symbols, no readable text or labels

Fan Knob

Turn the left knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the rear system off.

Temperature Knob

The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area. Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise for warmer or cooler air.

Mode Knob

The right knob on the control panel lets you choose the direction of the air flow.

→ (Vent): This setting directs the air through the headliner outlets.

(Bi-Level): This setting directs the air through the rear floor outlets under the third row seat, as well as the headliner outlets. The flow can be divided between headliner and floor outlets depending upon where the knob is placed between the settings.

(Floor): This setting directs the air through the floor outlets. The rear system floor outlets are located under the third row seats.

Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls

If your vehicle has this rear climate control system there are rear seat audio controls located in the center console.

The rear system can be controlled through the AUX button on the front climate control panel. Press the AUX button to turn the rear climate control system on or off. An indicator light in the AUX button comes on when the rear climate control system is on. The direction, temperature, and speed of the airflow for the rear of the vehicle will be the same as those set for the front of the vehicle.

Use the controls located in the rear of the front console, to independently control the air flow for the rear of the vehicle separately from that of the front of the vehicle. To turn the system on, press any of the rear air conditioning control buttons, except the fan down button. To turn the system off, press and hold the ✕ button.

Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls

Manual Operation

✿✿(Fan): The fan buttons on the rear seat audio control panel let you manually adjust the fan speed. Press ✦to increase airflow and ✦ to decrease airflow.

+/- (Increase/Decrease Temperature): These buttons select the temperature of the air flowing into the rear passenger area. Press the + button for warmer air and press the - button for cooler air. The temperature settings will display in 0-12 increments, going from the coolest (0) to the warmest (12) setting.

√(Mode): Press the mode button to manually change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle. Repeatedly press the button until the desired mode appears on the display. Multiple presses cycles through the delivery selections.

(Vent): This mode directs air through the headliner outlets.

(Bi-Level): This mode directs air through the floor outlets as well as the headliner outlets. The rear system floor outlets are located under the third row seats.

(Floor): This mode directs air through the floor outlets. The rear system floor outlets are located under the third row seats.

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators

This part describes the warning lights and gages on your vehicle. The pictures help to locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle's functions. As the details show on the next few pages, some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they are working. If you are familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle's functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there is a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on as you are driving, or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this manual's advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous. So please get to know your vehicle's warning lights and gages. They can be a big help.

Instrument Panel Cluster

The instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how the vehicle is running. You will know how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar

Speedometer and Odometer

The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles or kilometers.

Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. If your vehicle needs a new odometer installed, the new one will be set to the mileage total of the old odometer. If this is not possible, it will be set at zero and a label must be put on the driver's door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed. If the mileage is unknown, the label should then indicate "previous mileage unknown".

Tachometer

The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).

Safety Belt Reminder Light

When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts, unless the driver's safety belt is already buckled.

Silhouette of a person sitting with a crossbar and belt, indicating no change or caution (no text or symbols)

The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for several seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion.

If the driver's belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will come on.

Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light

Several seconds after the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will sound for several seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would only occur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See PassengerSensingSystemon page86for more information. The passenger safety belt light will also come on and stay on for several seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and light are repeated if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger's safety belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the light will come on.

Airbag Readiness Light

There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The system checks the airbag's electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag system, see AirbagSystemonpage76.

Simple black silhouette of a running person (no text or symbols)

This light will come on when you start your vehicle, and it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should go out. This means the system is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away.

CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle, it means the airbag system may not be working properly. The airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle serviced right away if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator

Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system. Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag status indicator.

United States Canada

When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds as a system check. If you use remote start to start your vehicle from a distance, if your vehicle has this feature, you may not see the system check. Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger's frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the right front passenger's frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag are enabled (may inflate).

CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you have a rear-facing child restraint installed in the right front passenger's seat, it means that the passenger sensing system has not turned off the passenger's frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped). A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger's airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing child restraint in the right front passenger's seat if the airbag is turned on.

CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) if the system detects a rear-facing child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off. We recommend that rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is or airbags are off.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger's frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag. See Passenger SensingSystemonpage86for more on this, including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system. See your dealer/retailer for service.

CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in the instrument panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle serviced promptly, because an adult-size person sitting in the right front passenger's seat may not have the protection of the airbag(s). See Airbag ReadinessLightonpage212for more on this, including important safety information.

Charging System Light

Simple electrical component symbol with battery terminals (no text or labels)

The charging system light will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition, but the engine is not running, as a check to show you it is working.

It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a problem with the charging system. It could indicate that you have problems with a generator drive belt, or another electrical problem. Have it checked right away. Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.

When this light comes on, the Driver Information Center (DIC) will also display the SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM message. See DICWarningsandMessagesonpage239 for more information.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.

Voltmeter Gage

When the engine is not running, but the ignition is turned to ON, this gage shows the battery's state of charge in DC volts.

When the engine is running, this gage shows the condition of the charging system. The vehicle's charging system regulates voltage based on the state of charge of the battery. The voltmeter may fluctuate. This is normal. Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range.

Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an extended period.

If there is a problem with the battery charging system, a SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM message will appear in the Driver Information Center (DIC) and/or the charging system light will come on. See DICWarningsand Messagesonpage239and ChargingSystem Lightonpage216for more information.

However, readings in either warning zone may indicate a possible problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.

Brake System Warning Light

Your vehicle's hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.

United States Canada

This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

This light may also come on due to low brake fluid. See Brakesonpage410for more information.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake does not release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a brake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. Make sure the parking brake is fully released. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See TowingYourVehicleonpage358.

CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident. If the light is still on after you have pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.

Antilock Brake System Warning Light

Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS).

This light will come on when your engine is started and may stay on for several seconds. This is normal.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to off. If the light comes on and the chime sounds when you are driving, pull your vehicle over to a safe location and stop as soon as possible.

Turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do not have antilock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, you do not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with your regular brakes. See BrakeSystem WarningLightonpage217earlier in this section.

The ABS warning light will come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. This is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

StabiliTrak® Indicator Light

Simple line drawing of a car with a wavy line underneath, enclosed in a triangle (no text or symbols)

This warning light should come on briefly when the engine is started.

If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. If it stays on, or comes on when you are driving, there may be a problem with your StabiliTrak® system and your vehicle may need service. When this warning light is on, the system is off and will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

This light will also flash when the StabiliTrak ^® system is active.

If the StabiliTrak ^® system warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on, your vehicle needs service. See StabiliTrak ^® Systemonpage329 for more information.

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light

Simple black thermometer icon above water surface, no text or symbols present

The engine coolant temperature warning light will come on when the engine has overheated.

If this happens you should pull over and turn off the engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheatingonpage400for more information.

Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature warning light on could cause your vehicle to overheat. See EngineOverheating onpage400. Your vehicle could be damaged, and it might not be covered by your warranty. Never drive with the engine coolant temperature warning light on.

This light will also come on briefly when starting your vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

United States Canada

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. Under normal driving conditions the gage will read 210^ F ( 100^ C) or less. If the gage pointer is near 260^ F ( 125^ C), the engine is too hot.

It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.

See EngineOverheatingonpage400for more information.

Tire Pressure Light

Warning symbol with exclamation mark inside a vehicle (no text or numbers)

This light comes on briefly when you turn the ignition to ON.

It will also come on when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated.

A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE Driver Information Center (DIC) message will accompany the light. See DICWarningsandMessageson page239for more information.

Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure. See Tiresonpage425for more information.

This light will flash for about 70 seconds and then stay on if a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor system.

See TirePressureMonitorSystemonpage433 for more information.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light

Simple line drawing of a vehicle or valve (no text or symbols)

Your vehicle has a computer which monitors operation of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to make sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The check engine light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after a while, the emission controls might not work as well, your vehicle's fuel economy might not be as good, and the engine might not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by your warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine, transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle's emission controls and can cause this light to come on. Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty. This could also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories and Modificationsonpage377.

This light should come on, as a check to show you it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired. This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required.

If the Light is Flashing

The following can prevent more serious damage to your vehicle:

• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.

- If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see "If the Light Is On Steady" following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart the engine. If the light remains on steady, see "If the Light Is On Steady" following. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.

If the Light Is On Steady

You might be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the cap. See FillingtheTankonpage381. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your vehicle's electrical system might be wet. The condition is usually corrected when the electrical system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See GasolineOctaneonpage379. Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up. This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions, change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs

Some state/provincial and local governments have or might begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to help your vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if you have recently replaced the battery or if the battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving. This can take several days of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure Light

CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If you do, your engine can become so hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned. Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.

Simple line drawing of a boat with a handle and water droplet (no text or symbols)

This light tells you if there could be a problem with your engine oil pressure.

The light comes on when you turn your key to ON or START. It goes off once you start your engine. That is a check to be sure the light works. If it does not come on, be sure to have it fixed so it will be there to warn you if something goes wrong.

When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not flowing through your engine properly. You could be low on oil and you might have some other system problem.

Security Light

Simple black icon of a padlock with an open trunk, symbolizing secure or locked security (no text or symbols)

This light flashes when the security system is activated.

For more information, see Theft-DeterrentSystems onpage119.

Fog Lamp Light

Simple black-and-white diagram with a vertical line and a shaded circle, no text or symbols present.

The fog lamp light will come on when the fog lamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off. See FogLampsonpage184for more information.

Cruise Control Light

Simple circular gauge or speedometer icon with directional arrows, no text or symbols present

This light comes on whenever you set the cruise control.

The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off. See CruiseControlonpage179for more information.

Highbeam On Light

Simple black-and-white diagram of a lightning bolt with three parallel lines indicating sound waves (no text or symbols)

This light comes on when the high-beam headlamps are in use.

See HeadlampHigh/Low-BeamChangeron page175for more information.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

Simple black silhouette of a vehicle with two wheels (no text or symbols)

This light comes on when the Tow/Haul mode has been activated.

For more information, see Tow/HaulModeon page132.

Fuel Gage

United States Canada

When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have left in the fuel tank. The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible.

When the fuel tank is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC). For more information see DICWarningsandMessagesonpage239.

Here are some situations you may experience with your fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage.

• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank's capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the ignition.

Driver Information Center (DIC)

Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).

The DIC displays information about your vehicle. It also displays warning messages if a system problem is detected.

All messages will appear in the DIC display located at the top of the instrument panel cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off.

The DIC also displays a shift lever position indicator on the bottom line of the display. See Automatic TransmissionOperationonpage129for more information.

The outside air temperature also displays on the DIC when viewing the trip and fuel information. The outside air temperature automatically appears in the top right corner of the DIC display. If there is a problem with the system that controls the temperature display, the numbers will be replaced with dashes. If this occurs, have the vehicle serviced.

If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see "DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons)" later in this section and DICVehicleCustomization (WithDICButtons)onpage250for the displays available.

If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, see "DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)" later in this section for the displays available.

DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons)

If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the information below explains the operation of this system.

The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument panel. See InstrumentPanel Overviewpage170for more information.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system information, and warning messages if a system problem is detected.

The DIC also allows some features to be customized. See DICVehicleCustomization(With DICButtons)onpage250for more information.

If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can also use the trip odometer reset stem to view the odometer and trip odometers.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are the set/reset, customization, vehicle information, and trip/fuel buttons. The button functions are detailed in the following pages.

√ (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC.

(Customization): Press this button to customize the feature settings on your vehicle. See DICVehicleCustomization(WithDICButtons) onpage250for more information.

i (Vehicle Information): Press this button to display the oil life, park assist on vehicles with this feature, units, tire pressure readings, Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system programming, and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter programming.

( Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display the odometer, trip odometers, fuel range, average economy, timer, fuel used, and average speed.

Vehicle Information Menu Items

(i) (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll through the following menu items:

OIL LIFE

Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate of the oil's remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the current oil life remains. The engine oil life system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DICWarningsandMessagesonpage239. You should change the oil as soon as you can. See EngineOilonpage387. In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled Maintenanceonpage488for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, see EngineOil LifeSystemonpage390.

PARK ASSIST

If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, press the vehicle information button until PARK ASSIST displays. This display allows the system to be turned on or off. Once in this display, press the set/reset button to select between ON or OFF. If you choose ON, the system will be turned on. If you choose OFF, the system will be turned off. The URPA system automatically turns back on after each vehicle start. When the URPA system is turned off and the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P), the DIC will display the PARK ASSIST OFF message as a reminder that the system has been turned off. See DICWarningsandMessagesonpage239and UltrasonicRearParkingAssist(URPA)on page188for more information.

UNITS

Press the vehicle information button until UNITS displays. This display allows you to select between English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this display, press the set/reset button to select between ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of the vehicle information will then be displayed in the unit of measurement selected.

FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES

The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the vehicle information button until the DIC displays FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle information button again until the DIC displays REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the system while driving, a message advising you to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display. See Inflation-Tire Pressureonpage432and DICWarnings andMessagesonpage239for more information.

If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.

RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS

After rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system must re-learn the tire positions. To re-learn the tire positions, see TirePressureMonitorSystemon page433. See TireInspectionandRotationon page438 and DICWarningsandMessageson page239 for more information.

RELEARN REMOTE KEY

This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match a RKE transmitter to your vehicle, do the following:

1. Press the vehicle information button until PRESS √ TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the first transmitter at the same time for about 15 seconds.

On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the second will match driver 2.

A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is matched.

1. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat Step 3.
   Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it.
2. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the key to OFF.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

( Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through the following menu items:

ODOMETER

Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays. This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display the odometer.

To switch between English and metric measurements, see "UNITS" later in this section.

TRIP A and TRIP B

Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP A or TRIP B displays. This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for each trip odometer. Both trip odometers can be used at the same time. Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display the trip odometers.

Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by pressing the set/reset button or the trip odometer reset stem while the desired trip odometer is displayed.

The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition was last turned on. This can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the set/reset button for at least four seconds. The trip odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate mileage.

For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles (8 km) before it is started again, and then the retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature is activated after the vehicle is started, but before it begins moving, the display will show the number of miles (mi) or kilometers (km) that were driven during the last ignition cycle.

RANGE

Press the trip/fuel button until RANGE displays. This display shows the approximate number of remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle can be driven without refueling. The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle's fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. This estimate will change if driving conditions change.

For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent stops, this display may read one number, but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may change even though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This is because different driving conditions produce different fuel economies. Generally, freeway driving produces better fuel economy than city driving. Fuel range cannot be reset.

AVG (Average) ECONOMY

Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays. This display shows the approximate average miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number is calculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this menu item was reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and hold the set/reset button.

TIMER

Press the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays. This display can be used as a timer.

To start the timer, press the set/reset button while TIMER is displayed. The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset, not including time the ignition is off. Time will continue to be counted as long as the ignition is on, even if another display is being shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which the display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press the set/reset button briefly while TIMER is displayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the set/reset button while TIMER is displayed.

FUEL USED

Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED displays. This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel used information, press and hold the set/reset button while FUEL USED is displayed.

AVG (Average) SPEED

Press the trip/fuel button until AVG SPEED displays. This display shows the average speed of the vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). This average is calculated based on the various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of this value. To reset the value to zero, press and hold the set/reset button.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)

If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the information below explains the operation of this system.

The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the instrument panel cluster. Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also turn off, or acknowledge, DIC messages. The DIC displays trip and vehicle system information, and warning messages if a system problem is detected.

If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, you can use the trip odometer reset stem to view the following displays: odometer, trip odometers, oil life, park assist menu for vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system programming, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter programming, units, and display language.

If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can use the trip odometer reset stem to view the following displays: odometer and trip odometers.

Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items ODOMETER

Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER displays. This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).

To switch between English and metric measurements, see "UNITS" later in this section.

TRIP A or TRIP B

Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP A or TRIP B displays. This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for each trip odometer. Both trip odometers can be used at the same time.

Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem while the desired trip odometer is displayed.

The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition was last turned on. This can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for at least four seconds. The trip odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles (8 km) before it is started again, and then the retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature is activated after the vehicle is started, but before it begins moving, the display will show the number of miles (mi) or kilometers (km) that were driven during the last ignition cycle.

OIL LIFE

To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P). Press the trip odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate of the oil's remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the current oil life remains. The engine oil life system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DICWarningsandMessagesonpage239. You should change the oil as soon as you can. See EngineOilonpage387. In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled Maintenanceonpage488for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, see EngineOil LifeSystemonpage390.

PARK ASSIST

To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P). If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, press the trip odometer reset stem until PARK ASSIST displays. This display allows the system to be turned on or off. Once in this display, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem to select between ON or OFF. If you choose ON, the system will be turned on. If you choose OFF, the system will be turned off. The URPA system automatically turns back on after each vehicle start. When the URPA system is turned off and the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P), the DIC will display the PARK ASSIST OFF message as a reminder that the system has been turned off. See DIC WarningsandMessagesonpage239and UltrasonicRearParkingAssist(URPA)on page188for more information.

RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS

To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P). After rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system must re-learn the tire positions. To re-learn the tire positions, see TirePressure MonitorSystemonpage433. See TireInspection andRotationonpage438and DICWarnings andMessagesonpage239for more information.

RELEARN REMOTE KEY

To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P). This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle, do the following:

1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.

2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem until REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.

3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the first transmitter at the same time for about 15 seconds.
   On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the second will match driver 2.
   A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is matched.

4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat Step 3.

Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it.

1. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the key to OFF.

UNITS

To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P). Press the trip odometer reset stem until UNITS displays. This display allows you to select between English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this display, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem to select between ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of the vehicle information will then be displayed in the unit of measurement selected.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P). This display allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear. To select a language, do the following:

1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until DISPLAY LANGUAGE, LANGUE AFFICHAGE (French), or MOSTRAR IDIOMA (Spanish) displays.
2. Continue to press and hold the trip odometer reset stem to scroll through all of the available languages.
   The available languages are ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS (French), and ESPANOL (Spanish).
3. Once the desired language is displayed, release the trip odometer reset stem to set your choice.

DIC Warnings and Messages

Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some action may be needed by the driver to correct the condition. Multiple messages may appear one after another.

Some messages may not require immediate action, but you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument panel or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument panel cluster to acknowledge that you received the messages and to clear them from the display.

Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display because they are more urgent. These messages require action before they can be cleared. You should take any messages that appear on the display seriously and remember that clearing the messages will only make the messages disappear, not correct the problem.

The following are the possible messages that can be displayed and some information about them.

ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF

If your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system, this message displays when there is a compact spare tire on the vehicle, when the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) warning light comes on, or when the rear differential fluid is overheating. This message turns off when the differential fluid cools.

The AWD system is disabled until the compact spare tire is replaced by a full-size tire. If the warning message is still on after putting on the full-size tire, you need to reset the warning message. To reset the warning message, turn the ignition off and then back on again after 30 seconds. If the message stays on, see your dealer/retailer right away. See All-WheelDrive (AWD)Systemonpage332for more information.

This message displays when the automatic headlamps are turned off. This message clears itself after 10 seconds.

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON

This message displays when the automatic headlamps are turned on. This message clears itself after 10 seconds.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when the system detects that the battery voltage is dropping below expected levels. The battery saver system starts reducing certain features of the vehicle that you may be able to notice. At the point that the features are disabled, this message is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to save the charge in the battery.

Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery to recharge.

The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when the engine oil needs to be changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message. See EngineOilLifeSystem onpage390for information on how to reset the message. See EngineOilonpage387and ScheduledMaintenanceonpage488for more information.

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE

This message displays when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle's tires need to be checked. This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs to be checked. You can receive more than one tire pressure message at a time. To read the other messages that may have been sent at the same time, press the set/reset button or the trip odometer reset stem. If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label. See Tiresonpage425, LoadingYourVehicleon page353, and Inflation-TirePressureon page432. The DIC display also shows the tire pressure values for the front and rear tires by pressing the vehicle information button. See "DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons)" earlier in this section. If the tire pressure is low, the low tire pressure warning light comes on. See TirePressureLightonpage221.

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message displays whenever the cruise control is set. See CruiseControlonpage179for more information.

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver's door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.

ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning) OFF

This message displays when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature. See EngineCoolantTemperature Gageonpage220. To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air conditioning compressor automatically turns off. When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning compressor turns back on. You can continue to drive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear, have the system repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible to avoid damage to the engine.

ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL

If your vehicle has an oil level sensor, this message displays if the oil level in the vehicle is low. Check the oil level and correct it as necessary. You may need to let the vehicle cool or warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure this message clears. See EngineOilonpage387 for additional information.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above normal idling speed. See EngineOverheatingon page400for more information.

This message displays when the engine coolant temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down. See EngineCoolant TemperatureGageonpage220.

See OverheatedEngineProtectionOperating Modeonpage402for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. See EngineOverheatingonpage400for more information.

This message displays and a chime sounds if the engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe damage. This message clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating temperature.

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays and a chime sounds when the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters the engine coolant protection mode. See EngineOverheatingon page400for further information.

This message also displays when the vehicle's engine power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle's ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your destination. The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See FuelGageonpage227and Fuelonpage379 for more information.

HEATED WASH (Washer) FLUID SYSTEM OFF

If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays when you manually turn off the heated windshield washer fluid system or when the system automatically turns off. See "Heated Windshield Washer" under WindshieldWasheron page177for more information. This message clears itself after 10 seconds.

HEATING WASH (Washer) FLUID WASH (Washer) WIPES PENDING

If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays when you turn on the heated windshield washer fluid system. See “Heated Windshield Washer” under WindshieldWasheronpage177for more information.

HOOD OPEN

This message displays and a chime sounds if the hood is not fully closed. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the hood for obstructions, and close the hood again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE

This message displays when the outside air temperature is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver's side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.

LIFTGATE OPEN

This message displays and a chime sounds if the liftgate is open while the ignition is in ON. Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate. Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected. See EngineOilonpage387 for more information.

This message displays if low oil pressure levels occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. See EngineOilonpage387.

PARK ASSIST OFF

If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, after the vehicle has been started and shifted out of PARK (P), this message displays to remind the driver that the URPA system has been turned off. Press the set/reset button or the trip odometer reset stem to acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display. To turn the URPA system back on, see UltrasonicRearParkingAssist (URPA)onpage188.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger's door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.

REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays while you are matching a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle. See "Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle" under RemoteKeylessEntry(RKE) SystemOperationonpage100and DICOperation andDisplays(WithDICButtons)onpage229or DICOperationandDisplays(WithoutDICButtons) onpage235for more information.

REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY

This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. The battery needs to be replaced in the transmitter. See "Battery Replacement" under RemoteKeyless Entry(RKE)SystemOperationonpage100.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger's side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.

SERVICE A/C (Air Conditioning) SYSTEM

This message displays when the electronic sensors that control the air conditioning and heating systems are no longer working. Have the climate control system serviced by your dealer/retailer if you notice a drop in heating and air conditioning efficiency.

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays if there is a problem with the airbag system. Have your dealer/retailer inspect the system for problems. See Airbag ReadinessLightonpage212and AirbagSystem onpage76for more information.

SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE

If your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system, this message displays if there is a problem with this system. If this message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle after 30 seconds and check for the message on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving, the AWD system needs service. See your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM

On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a problem with the battery charging system. Under certain conditions, the charging system light may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster. See ChargingSystemLightonpage216. Driving with this problem could drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible. See your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This message displays along with the brake system warning light if there is a problem with the brake system. See BrakeSystemWarning Lightonpage217. If this message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving, the brake system needs service as soon as possible. See your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, this message displays if there is a problem with the URPA system. Do not use this system to help you park. See UltrasonicRearParkingAssist(URPA)on page188for more information. See your dealer/retailer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message displays when a problem is detected with the power steering system. When this message is displayed, you may notice that the effort required to steer the vehicle increases or feels heavier, but you will still be able to steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer immediately.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is a problem with the StabiliTrak ^® system. If this message appears, try to reset the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at least 15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this message still comes on, it means there is a problem. See your dealer/retailer for service. The vehicle is safe to drive, however, you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak ^® , so reduce your speed and drive accordingly.

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM

This message displays when there is a problem with the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may or may not restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer before turning off the engine. See PASS-Key ^® III+Operationon page121for more information.

SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM

This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system is not working properly. If you drive your vehicle while any of the four sensors are missing or inoperable, the warning comes on in about 20 minutes. A sensor would be missing, for example, if you put different wheels on your vehicle without transferring the sensors. If the warning comes on and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPM. See your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL

This message displays when there is a problem with the Traction Control System (TCS). When this message is displayed, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. See your dealer/retailer for service. See StabiliTrak® Systemonpage329for more information.

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays when there is a problem with the transmission. See your dealer/retailer for service.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message displays when a non-emissions related malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.

SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (KM/H)

This message displays when your vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph (128 km/h) because the vehicle detects a problem in the speed variable assist steering system. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

STARTING DISABLED SERVICE THROTTLE

This message displays when your vehicle's throttle system is not functioning properly. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the content theft-deterrent system has detected a break-in attempt while you were away from your vehicle. See Content Theft-Deterrentonpage119for more information.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may display along with the check engine light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle's fuel cap is not tightened properly. See MalfunctionIndicatorLamponpage222. Reinstall the fuel cap fully. See FillingtheTankon page381. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn this light and message off.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system is re-learning the tire positions on your vehicle. See DICOperationand Displays(WithDICButtons)onpage229or DICOperationandDisplays(WithoutDICButtons) onpage235for more information. The tire positions must be re-learned after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor. See Tire InspectionandRotationonpage438, Tire PressureMonitorSystemonpage433, and Inflation-TirePressureonpage432for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See StabiliTrak® Systemonpage329 for more information. This message clears itself after 10 seconds.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the transmission fluid is overheating and the transmission temperature warning is displayed on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you can damage the transmission. This could lead to costly repairs that would not be covered by your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with overheated transmission fluid or while the transmission temperature warning is displayed.

This message displays along with a continuous chime if the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the transmission to cool. This message clears and the chime stops when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the off position.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID

This message displays when the windshield washer fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible. See Engine CompartmentOverviewpage386for the location of the windshield washer fluid reservoir. Also, see WindshieldWasherFluidonpage409 for more information.

DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)

Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to one preferred setting. Customization features can only be programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred setting for two different drivers.

All of the customization options may not be available on your vehicle. Only the options available will be displayed on the DIC.

The default settings for the customization features were set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed from their default state since then.

The customization preferences are automatically recalled.

To change customization preferences, use the following procedure.

Entering the Feature Settings Menu

1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in PARK (P).
   To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the customization button to enter the feature settings menu. If the menu is not available, FEATURE SETTINGS AVAILABLE IN PARK will display. Before entering the menu, make sure the vehicle is in PARK (P).

Feature Settings Menu Items

The following are customization features that allow you to program settings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if a language other than English has been set. This feature allows you to change the language in which the DIC messages appear to English.

Press the customization button until the PRESS √ TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH, APPUYER √ POUR AFFICHAGE ANGLAIS in French, or PULSE √ PARA MOSTRAR INGLES in Spanish screen appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to display all DIC messages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear.

Press the customization button until the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in English.

FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and press the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it.

You can also change the language by pressing the trip odometer reset stem. See “Language” under DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) earlier in this section for more information.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select when the vehicle's doors will automatically lock. See ProgrammableAutomaticDoorLocksonpage107 for more information.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for three seconds.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and press the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it.

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also allows you to select which doors and when the doors will automatically unlock. See ProgrammableAutomaticDoorLocksonpage107 for more information.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver's door will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver's door will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and press the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it.

REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See RemoteKeylessEntry(RKE) SystemOperationonpage100for more information.

Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed again within five seconds of the previous command.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and press the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it.

REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See RemoteKeylessEntry (RKE)SystemOperationonpage100for more information.

Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and press the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it.

DELAY DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select whether or not the locking of the vehicle's doors and liftgate will be delayed. When locking the doors and liftgate with the power door lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open, this feature will delay locking the doors and liftgate until five seconds after the last door is closed. You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use. The key must be out of the ignition for this feature to work. You can temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice. See DelayedLockingon page107for more information.

Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle's doors.

ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds after the last door or the liftgate is closed.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and press the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it.

EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark enough outside. This happens after the key is turned from ON to OFF.

Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.

30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on for 30 seconds.

1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for one minute.

2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for two minutes.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and press the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it.

APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select whether or not to have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button until APPROACH LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle is no longer off. See Remote KeylessEntry(RKE)SystemOperationon page100for more information.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and press the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it.

CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select the volume level of the chime.

Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings:

NORMAL (default): The chime volume will be set to a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and press the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it.

PARK TILT MIRRORS

If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select whether or not the outside mirror(s) will automatically tilt down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R). See OutsidePower FoldawayMirrorsonpage143for more information.

Press the customization button until PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driver's outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).

PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger's outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver's and passenger's outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and press the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it.

EASY EXIT SEAT

If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature. See MemorySeatandMirrorson page13for more information.

Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recall will occur.

ON: The driver's seat will move back when the key is removed from the ignition.

The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur one time after the key is removed from the ignition.

If the automatic movement has already occurred, and you put the key back in the ignition and remove it again, the seat will stay in the original exit position, unless a memory recall took place prior to removing the key again.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and press the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it.

MEMORY SEAT RECALL

If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select your preference for the remote memory seat recall feature. See MemorySeatandMirrorson page13for more information.

Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will occur.

ON: The driver's seat and outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored driving position when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed. See "Relearn Remote Key" under DICOperationandDisplays(WithDICButtons)onpage229or DICOperation andDisplays(WithoutDICButtons)onpage235 for more information on matching transmitters to driver ID numbers.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and press the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it.

REMOTE START

If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See "Remote Vehicle Start" under RemoteKeylessEntry(RKE)System Operationonpage100for more information.

Press the customization button until REMOTE START appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.

ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and press the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it.

FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all of the customization features back to their factory default settings.

Press the customization button until FACTORY SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features will be set to their factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will not be set to their factory default settings.

Choose one of the available settings and press the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it.

EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu.

Press the customization button until FEATURE SETTINGS PRESS √ TO EXIT appears in the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to exit the menu.

If you do not exit, pressing the customization button again will return you to the beginning of the feature settings menu.

Exiting the Feature Settings Menu

The feature settings menu will be exited when any of the following occurs:

• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
• The vehicle is no longer in ON.
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are pressed.
• The end of the feature settings menu is reached and exited.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no selection made.

Audio System(s)

Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the pages following to familiarize yourself with its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer driving experience. See DefensiveDrivingon page322. By taking a few moments to read this manual and get familiar with your vehicle's audio system, you can use it with less effort, as well as take advantage of its features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the tone and adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite stations using the presets and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

CAUTION:

This system provides you with far greater access to audio stations and song listings. Giving extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving can cause a crash and you or others can be injured or killed. Always keep your eyes on the road and your mind on the drive — avoid engaging in extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe driving. Here are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite radio stations using the presets and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can be added by checking with your dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can be added, it is very important to do it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle's engine, radio, or other systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle's systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added.

Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off. See RetainedAccessoryPower (RAP)onpage125for more information.

Setting the Time

MP3 Radios with a Single CD or a Single CD and DVD Player

If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD or a CD and DVD player, it has a ⏻(clock) button for setting the time and date.

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) or RUN. Press the power knob, located in the center of the radio, to turn the radio on.
2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the labels that you want to change. Every time the pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if selected, increases by one.
4. Another way to increase the time or date, is to press the right ▶I SEEK arrow or the ▶▷ FWD (forward) button.
5. To decrease the time or date, press the left ◀ SEEK arrow or ◀ REV (reverse) button, or turn the ♪ knob, located on the upper right side of the radio, to adjust the selected setting.

Changing the Time and Date Default Settings

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to 24 hour or to change the date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year, follow these instructions:

1. Press the clock button and then the pushbutton located under the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the radio screen until the time 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM (day and month) displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired option.
3. Press the clock button again to apply the selected default, or let the screen time out.

MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player

If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player, the radio has a MENU button instead of the ⏻(clock) button to set the time and date.

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Once the clock option displays, press the pushbutton located under that label. The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the labels that you want to change. Every time the pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if selected, increases by one.
4. Another way to increase the time or date, is to press the right ▷ SEEK arrow or the ▷ FWD (forward) button.
5. To decrease the time or date, press the left SEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button. You can also turn the tune knob, located on the upper right side of the radio, to adjust the selected setting.

Changing the Time and Date Default Settings

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to 24 hour or to change the date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year, follow these instructions:

1. Press the MENU button. Once the clock option displays, press the pushbutton located under the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the radio screen until the 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM (day and month) displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired option.
3. Press the MENU button again to apply the selected default, or let the screen time out.

Radio with CD

Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3) similar

Radio Data System (RDS)

The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.

This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and only works when the information is available. While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters appear on the display. In rare cases, a radio station can broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast channels including music, news, sports, talk, traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children's programming. XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information that includes song title and artist name. A service fee is required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696) or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio

(Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the system on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume.

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio has Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). When SCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjusts to compensate for road and wind noise as you speed up or slow down while driving. That way, the volume level should sound about the same as you drive.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu.

3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM (volume) label on the radio display.

4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med, or High) to select the level of radio volume compensation. Press the pushbutton located below the BACK label on the MENU SETUP display or let the display time out after approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting allows for more radio volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM, or XM ^TM (if equipped). The selection displays.

♪(Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

SEEK ▶ : Press the right or left SEEK arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio seeks and scans only stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band.

i (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service, MP3, and RDS Features): Press the information button to display additional text information related to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3 song. A choice of additional information such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category) can appear. Continue pressing the information button to highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned under any one of the labels and the information about that label displays.

When information is not available, No Info displays.

Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite

Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to your favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature. See DefensiveDrivingon page322.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station frequency labels and by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button). Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations available per page. Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped) stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform the following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where you want the station stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed and released, the station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station you want stored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages can be setup using the MENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages, perform the following steps:

1. Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the FAV 1-6 label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by pressing the pushbutton located below the displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to return to the original main radio screen showing the radio station frequency labels and to begin the process of programming your favorites for the chosen amount of numbered pages.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or

Treble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the tune knob until the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting. You can also adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either the SEEK, FWD or REV button until the desired levels are obtained. If a station's frequency is weak or if there is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle position, press the pushbutton positioned under the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position, press the tune knob for more than two seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select preset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press the EQ button until Manual displays or start to manually adjust the bass, midrange, or treble by pressing the tune knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or fade, press the tune knob until the speaker control labels display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting. You can also adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either the SEEK, FWD (forward), or REV (reverse) button until the desired levels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position, press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the middle position, press the tune knob for more than two seconds until a beep sounds.

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM ^TM stations when the radio is in the XM ^TM mode. To find XM ^TM channels within a desired category, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM ^TM frequency displays. Press the CAT button to display the category labels on the radio display. Continue pressing the CAT button until the desired category name displays.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired category label to immediately tune to the first XM ^TM station associated with that category.
3. Rotate the tune knob, press the buttons below the right or left arrows displayed, or press the right or left SEEK buttons to go to the next or previous XM ^TM station within the selected category.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV button or BAND button to display your favorites again.

Undesired XM ^™ categories can be removed through the setup menu. To remove an undesired category, perform the following:

1. Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT label.
3. Rotate the tune knob to display the category you want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove label until the category name along with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressing the pushbutton under the Add label when a removed category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton under the Restore All label.

You cannot remove or add categories while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If Calibration Error displays, it means that the radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle and it must be returned to your dealer/retailer for service.

Locked: This message displays when the THEFTLOCK ^® system has locked up the radio. Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

Radio Messages for XM™ Only

See XMRadioMessagesonpage303later in this section for further detail.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)

Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)

LOAD ☑: Press this button to load CDs into the CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Press and release the load button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the load button for two seconds. A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading more CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As each new track starts to play, the track number displays.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R has been handled. There can be an increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does not play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see CareofYourCDsandDVDsonpage320for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD player could be damaged. While using the CD player, use only CDs in good condition without any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and debris.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen.

If an error displays, see "CD Messages" later in this section.

△ EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject CD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and release this button. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed. If the CD is not removed, after several seconds, the CD is automatically pulled back into the player and begins playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject button for two seconds to eject all discs.

♪(Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the CD that is currently playing.

SEEK ▷ : Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current track, if more than ten seconds on the CD have been played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player continues moving backward or forward through the tracks on the CD.

REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to reverse playback quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the track displays.

FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to advance playback quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, the tracks can be listened to in random, rather than sequential order, on one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of the following:

- Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD player, insert a disc partway into the slot of the CD player. A RDM label displays.

To play the tracks from the single CD in random order, press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc is displayed. Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play.

- Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD player, press and hold the LOAD button. A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays. Insert one or more discs partway into the slot of the CD player.

To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD player in random order, press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message showing disc and/or track number displays when a CD is in the player. Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected, "no input device found" displays.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc

If you have a radio with a six-disc CD player, it has the capability of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc, see "Using an MP3" in the index.

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If this message displays and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again.
• There could have been a problem while burning the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack. You can however, connect an external audio device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See DefensiveDrivingonpage322for more information on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio's front auxiliary input jack. When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playing audio from the device over the vehicle speakers.

(Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of the portable player. You might need to do additional volume adjustments from the portable device if the volume does not go loud or soft enough.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a portable audio device is playing. The portable audio device continues playing, so you might want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD when a portable audio device is playing. Press this button again and the system begins playing audio from the connected portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected, "No input device found" displays.

Radio with CD and DVD

If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear SeatEntertainmentSystemonpage305for more information on the vehicle's RSE system.

The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate. The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media (DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.).

Manufactured under license from Dolby ^® Laboratories. Dolby ^® and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby ^® Laboratories.

Radio Data System (RDS)

The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and only works when the information is available. While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio station can broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast channels including music, news, sports, talk, traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children's programming. XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information that includes song title and artist name. A service fee is required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696) or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio

(Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the system on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume.

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio has Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). When SCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjusts to compensate for road and wind noise as you speed up or slow down while driving. That way, the volume level should sound about the same as you drive. To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM (volume) label on the radio display.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired SCV setting (OFF, Low, Med, or High) to select the level of radio volume compensation. Press the pushbutton located below the BACK label on the MENU SETUP display or let the display time out after approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting allows for more radio volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM, or XM ^TM (if equipped). The display shows the selection.

♪(Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

SEEK ▷ : Press the right or left SEEK arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio seeks and scans only stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band.

i (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service, MP3, and RDS Features): Press the information button to display additional text information related to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3 song. A choice of additional information such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category) can appear. Continue pressing the information button to highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned under any one of the labels and the information about that label displays.

When information is not available, No Info displays.

Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite

Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to your favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has them. See DefensiveDrivingon page322.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station frequency labels and by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button).

Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations available per page. Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM ^™ (if equipped) stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform the following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where you want the station stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed and released, the station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station you want stored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages can be setup using the MENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages, perform the following steps:

1. Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton located below the FAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by pressing the pushbutton located below the displayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to return to the original main radio screen showing the radio station frequency labels and to begin the process of programming your favorites for the chosen amount of numbered pages.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or

Treble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the tune knob until the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting. If a station's frequency is weak or if there is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle position, press the pushbutton positioned under the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position. To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position, press the tune knob for more than two seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed for different types of music. The choices are pop, rock, country, talk, jazz, and classical. Selecting MANUAL or changing bass or treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source. If your radio has a Bose ^® audio system, the EQ settings are either MANUAL or TALK.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or fade, press the tune knob until the speaker control labels display. Press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting. You can also adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either the SEEK, FWD, or REV button until the desired levels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position, press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust both the balance and fade to the middle position at one time, press the tune knob for more than two seconds until a beep sounds.

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is turned on, the radio disables FADE and mutes the rear speakers.

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM ^TM stations when the radio is in the XM ^TM mode. To find XM ^TM channels within a desired category, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM ^TM frequency displays. Press the CAT button to display the category labels on the radio display. Continue pressing the CAT button until the desired category name displays. Another way to navigate the category list is to press the REV button or the FWD button.

2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired category label to immediately tune to the first XM ^TM station associated with that category.

3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons below the right or left arrows displayed, or press the right or left SEEK buttons to go to the next or previous XM ^™ station within the selected category.

4. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV button or BAND button to display your favorites again.

Undesired XM ^™ categories can be removed through the setup menu. To remove an undesired category, perform the following:

1. Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT label.

3. Turn the tune knob to display the category you want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove label until the category name along with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressing the pushbutton under the Add label when a removed category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton under the Restore All label.

You cannot remove or add categories while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If Calibration Error displays, it means that the radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle and it must be returned to your dealer/retailer for service.

Locked: This message displays when the THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio. Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

Radio Messages for XM™ Only

See XMRadioMessagesonpage303later in this section for further detail.

Playing a CD (In Either the DVD or CD Slot)

Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing (loading a disc into the system, depending on media type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for a DVD to begin playing).

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. The CD is controlled by the buttons on the radio faceplate or by the RSA unit. See RearSeatAudio(RSA)onpage315for more information. The DVD/CD decks, (upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the CD deck) of the radio are compatible with most audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s.

When a CD is inserted, the text label DVD or CD symbol appears on the left side of the radio display. As each new track starts to play, the track number displays.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R has been handled. There can be an increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does not play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see CareofYourCDs andDVDsonpage320for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD player could be damaged. While using the CD player, use only CDs in good condition without any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and debris.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen.

If an error displays, see "CD Messages" later in this section.

△ CD (Eject): Press and release the CD eject button to eject the CD that is currently playing in the bottom slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed. If the CD is not removed, after several seconds, the CD is automatically pulled back into the player.

If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD eject button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject.

△ DVD (Eject): Press and release the DVD eject button to eject the CD that is currently playing in the top slot. You will hear a beep and Ejecting Disc will be displayed. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc will appear on display. The CD can be removed. If the CD is not removed, after several seconds, the CD will be automatically pulled back into the player.

If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD eject button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject.

♪(Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the CD that is currently playing.

SEEK ▶ : Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current track, if more than five seconds on the CD have been played. If less than five seconds on the CD has played, the previous track plays. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player continues moving backward or forward through the tracks on the CD.

◀◀ REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to reverse playback quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the track displays.

FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to advance playback quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, the tracks can be listened to in random, rather than sequential order. To play the tracks from the CD, press the DVD/CD AUX button when not sourced to the CD, or insert a disc partway into the slot. A RDM label displays. Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays. Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD or DVD is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment.

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message showing the track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot. Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected, "No aux input device" displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not indicate "No aux input device". If a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available). See "Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)" later in this section, or "Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks" under, Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 305 for more information.

If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only) through the remote control.

Audio Output

Only one audio source can be heard through the speakers at one time. An audio source is defined as DVD slot, CD slot, XM ^TM , FM/AM, Front Auxiliary Jack, or Rear Auxiliary Jack.

Press the power button to turn the radio on. The radio can be heard through all of the vehicle speakers.

Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM, FM, or XM) by pressing the BAND button or the DVD/CD AUX button to select CD slot, DVD slot, front or rear auxiliary input (if available).

If a playback device is plugged into the radio's front auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack, the front seat passengers are able to listen to playback from this source through the vehicle speakers. See "Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)" later in this section, or "Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks" under, RearSeatEntertainmentSystemon page305for more information.

In some vehicles, depending on audio options, the rear speakers can be muted when the RSA power is turned on. See RearSeatAudio(RSA) onpage315for more information.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc

Your radio with CD and DVD has the capability of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc, see "Using an MP3" in the index.

CD Messages

If these messages display and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:

Optical Error: If the disc was inserted upside down.

Disk Read Error: If a disc was inserted with an invalid or unknown format.

Player Error: If there are disc LOAD or disc EJECT problems.

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to normal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When the road becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again.
• There could have been a problem while burning the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.

Using the DVD Player

The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the remote control, or by the RSA system, or by the buttons on the radio faceplate. See "Remote Control", under RearSeatEntertainment Systemonpage305and RearSeatAudio (RSA)onpage315for more information.

The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.

The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along with MP3 and WMA formats.

If an error message appears on the video screen or the radio, see "DVD Display Error Messages" under, RearSeatEntertainmentSystemon page305 and "DVD Radio Error Messages" in this section for more information.

Playing a DVD

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot. Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected, "No aux input device" displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not indicate "No aux input device". If a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).

See "Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)" later in this section, or "Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks" under, Rear SeatEntertainmentSystemonpage305for more information.

(Power): Press this knob to turn the radio on or off. Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume. Press and hold the knob for more than two seconds to turn off the entire radio and Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system and to start the parental control feature. Parental control prevents the rear seat occupant from operating the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or remote control.

A lock symbol appears next to the clock display. The parental control feature remains on until you press and hold this button for more than two seconds again, or until the driver turns the ignition off and exits the vehicle.

♪(Tune): Turn this knob to change tracks on a CD or DVD, to manually tune a radio station, or to change clock or date settings, while in the clock or date setting mode. See the information given earlier in this section specific to the radio, CD, and the DVD. Also, see SettingtheTime onpage261, for setting the clock and date.

SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button to return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press this button again to go to the previous track or chapter. This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews.

SEEK ▷ (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to go to the next track or chapter. This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews.

REV (Reverse): Press this button to quickly reverse the CD or DVD, at five times the normal speed. The radio displays the elapsed time while in fast reverse. To stop fast reversing, press this button again. This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews.

FWD (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward the CD or DVD. The radio displays the elapsed time and fast forwards five times the normal speed. To stop fast forwarding, press this button again. This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews.

△ (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD or DVD. If a CD or DVD is ejected, but not removed, the player automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds.

If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed, because of an unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, press and hold the CD eject button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject.

DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons

Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during DVD playback. See the tag options listed below for more information.

The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-V menus and controls through the remote control. See “Remote Control”, under RearSeat EntertainmentSystemonpage305for more information. The Video Screen automatically turns on when the DVD-V is inserted into the DVD slot.

▶ / II (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forward arrow is showing on display, the system is in pause mode. If the pause icon is showing on display, the system is in playback mode. If the DVD screen is off, press the play button to turn the screen on.

Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have finished, although there could be a delay of up to 30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing the movie automatically, press the pushbutton located under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio. If the DVD still does not play, refer to the on-screen instructions, if available.

■ (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.

◀(Enter): Press this button to select the choices that are highlighted in any menu.

☐(Menu): Press this button to access the DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD. Use the pushbuttons located under the navigation arrows to navigate the cursor through the DVD menu. After making a selection press the enter button. This button only operates when using a DVD.

Nav (Navigate): Press this button to display directional arrows for navigating through the menus.

(Return): Press this button to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu. This button operates only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active.

DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons

Once a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menu shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during DVD playback. See the tag options listed below for more information.

The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-A menus and controls through the remote control. See “Remote Control”, under RearSeat EntertainmentSystemonpage305for more information. The Video Screen does not automatically power on when the DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot. It must be manually turned on by the rear seat occupant through the remote control power button.

▶ / II (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forward arrow is showing on display, the system is in pause mode. If the pause icon is showing on display, the system is in playback mode.

◀ Group ▶: Press this button to cycle through musical groupings on the DVD-A disc.

Nav (Navigate): Press this button to display directional arrows for navigating through the menus.

(Audio Stream): Press this button to cycle through audio steam formats located on a DVD-A disc. There is not any type of notification for the customer to see through the radio display, but VSM has a text field that shows audio stream changing.

Inserting a Disc

To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label side up, into the loading slot. The DVD player might not accept some paper labeled media. The player starts loading the disc into the system and display "Loading Disc" on the radio display. At the same time, the radio displays a softkey menu of option(s). Some discs automatically play the movie while others default to the softkey menu display which requires the Play, Enter, or Navigation softkeys to be pressed; either by softkey or by the rear seat passenger using the remote control.

Loading a disc into the system, depending on media type and format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for a DVD.

Stopping and Resuming Playback

To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system, press the stop button on the remote control, or press the pushbutton located under the stop or the play/pause symbol tags displayed on the radio. If the radio head is sourced to something other than DVD-V, press the DVD/CD AUX button to make DVD-V the active source.

To resume DVD playback, press the play/pause button on the remote control, or press the pushbutton located under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio. The DVD should resume play from where it last stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote control. If the disc has been ejected or the stop button has been pressed twice on the remote control, the disc resumes playing at the beginning of the disc.

Ejecting a Disc

Press the eject button on the radio to eject the disc. If a disc is ejected from the radio, but not removed, the radio reloads the disc after a short period of time. The disc is stored in the radio. The radio does not resume play of the disc automatically. If the RSA system is sourced to the DVD, the movie when reloaded into the DVD player begins to play again. In case loading and reading of a DVD or CD cannot be completed (unknown format, etc.), and the disc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD Eject button more than 5 seconds to force the disc to eject.

DVD Radio Error Messages

Player Error: This message displays when there are disc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if the disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc is not from a correct region.

No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc is present when the EJECT or DVD/CD AUX button is pressed on the radio.

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)

Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack. You can however, connect an external audio

device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD player, or cassette tape player, etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See DefensiveDrivingonpage322for more information on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) cable to the radio's front auxiliary input jack. When a device is connected, the radio automatically begins playing audio from the device over the vehicle speakers.

To listen to a device through the rear auxiliary input over the speakers, cycle the DVD/CD Aux button on the radio faceplate until "Rear Aux Input" displays on the radio. The RSA or DVD Screen must be on in order for the radio to source to rear auxiliary.

(Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of the portable player. You might need to do additional volume adjustments from the portable device if the volume does not go loud or soft enough.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a portable audio device is playing. The portable audio device continues playing, so you might want to stop it or power it off.

DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot. Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected, "No aux input device" displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not indicate "No aux input device". If a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available). See "Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)" later in this section, or "Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks" under, Rear SeatEntertainmentSystemonpage305for more information.

Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or Six-Disc CD Player)

MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc

The radio plays MP3/WMA files that were recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album are available for display by the radio when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

Compressed Audio

The radio also plays discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA files. By default the radio shows the MP3 label on the left side of the screen but plays both file formats in the order in which they were recorded to the disc.

MP3/WMA Format

If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal computer:

• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on one disc.
• The CD player is able to read and play a maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and a combined total of 512 folders and files.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving. Organize songs by albums using one folder for each album. Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension (other file extensions might not work).

• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a combination of a large number of files and folders, or playlists can cause the player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play a large number of files, folders, playlists or sessions, minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist name. Long names also take up more space on the display, potentially getting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to add music to an existing disc might cause the disc not to function in the player.

Playlists can be changed by using the previous and next folder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons. An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded can also be played using no file folders. If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and a combined total of 512 folders and files, the player lets you access and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over the maximum are not accessible.

Root Directory

The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files, the directory is displayed as the CD label. All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always accessed before root folders or files.

If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio (.CDA) and MP3/WMA files, a folder under the root directory called CD accesses all of the CD audio tracks on the disc.

Empty Directory or Folder

If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them, the player advances to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files. The empty folder does not display.

No Folder

When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only compressed files, the files are located under the root folder. The next and previous folder function does not display on a CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded without folders or playlists.

When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only playlists and compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root folder.

Order of Play

Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist has played, play continues from the first track of the first playlist.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder. When the last track of the last folder has played, play continues from the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless you have chosen the folder mode as the default display. The new track name displays.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename does not display.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited using the radio. These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3/WMA

Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (Single CD Player), or press the load button and wait for the message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R or CD-RW starts to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track number and song title displays.

If playing a CD-R or CD-RW, the sound quality can be reduced due to CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method of recording, the quality of the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R or CD-RW has been handled. There can be an increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does not play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see CareofYourCDsandDVDson page320for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD player could be damaged. While using the CD player, use only CDs in good condition without any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and debris.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen.

If an error displays, see "CD Messages" later in this section.

△ EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing, press and release this button. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the player and begins playing. For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject button for two seconds to eject all discs.

♪(Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW currently playing.

SEEK ▶: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA file. If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times, the player continues moving backward or forward through MP3/WMA files on the CD.

< (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the previous folder.

☐ > (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the next folder.

REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file displays.

FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to advance playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random, rather than sequential order, on one CD-R or CD-RW, or all discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of the following:

- To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RW in random order, press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play.

- To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD player in random order, press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play.

(Music Navigator): Use the music navigator feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label. The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It might take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of MP3/WMA files recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc in the background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.

Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist are played, the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA files by that artist.

To listen to MP3/WMA files by another artist, press the pushbutton located below either arrow button. The CD goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing either button until the desired artist is displayed.

To change from playback by artist to playback by album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the album button. Press the pushbutton below the back label to return to the main music navigator screen. Now the album name displays on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begins to play. Once all songs from that album are played, the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA files from that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA playback.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message showing disc and/or track number displays when a CD is in the player. Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected, "No Input Device Found" displays.

Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and DVD Player)

MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc

The radio plays MP3/WMA files that were recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album display when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs

The radio also plays discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA files depending on which slot the disc is loaded into. By default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio (.CDA) and ignores the MP3/WMA files on the DVD deck. On the CD deck, pressing the CAT button toggles between compressed and uncompressed audio format, the default being the uncompressed format (.CDA).

MP3/WMA Format

If an MP3/WMA disc is burned on a personal computer:

• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on one disc.

• Make sure the CD player (lower slot) is able to read and play a maximum combination of 512 files and folders. The DVD player (upper slot) is able to read 255 folders, 15 playlists and 40 sessions.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving. Organize songs by albums using one folder for each album. Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .m3u, .wpl or .pls extension as other file extensions may not work.
• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a combination of a large number of files and folders, or playlists can cause the player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play a large number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist name. Long names also take up more space on the display, potentially getting cut off.

- Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Trying to add music to an existing disc can cause the disc not to function in the player.

Root Directory

The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files, the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always accessed before root folders or files.

Empty Directory or Folder

If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them, the player advances to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files. The empty folder does not display.

No Folder

When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only compressed files, the files are located under the root folder. The next and previous folder function does not function on a CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.

When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only playlists and compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root folder. When the radio displays the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.

Order of Play

Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in the following order:

- Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist. After the last track of the last playlist has played, play continues from the first track of the first playlist.

- Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder. After the last track of the last folder has played, play continues from the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless the folder mode was chosen as the default display. The new track name displays.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename displays.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp ^™ , MusicMatch ^™ , or Real Jukebox ^™ software can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited using the radio. These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3/WMA (In Either the DVD or CD Slot)

Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into either the top or bottom slot, label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.

Depending on the format of the disc, a softkey menu appears and allows navigation of the disc. The menu reads left to right as RDM (Randomize song play order), a Folder icon with left and right arrows (to move up or down through available folders), a PL tag if the disc has a Playlist available, and a Music Navigator tag. If a Playlist tag is shown, toggling this key brings up a Folder softkey only or the menu as previously described. If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R or CD-RW starts to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track number and song title displays.

△ CD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the bottom slot. A sound is heard and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the player.

If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, press and hold this button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject.

△ DVD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the top slot. A sound is heard and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the player. If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, press and hold this button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject.

♪ (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing.

SEEK ▶ : Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than five seconds have played. If less than five seconds have played, the previous MP3/WMA file plays. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA file. If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player continues moving backward or forward through the MP3/WMA files on the CD.

< (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the previous folder.

(Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the next folder.

REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. A sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file displays.

FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to advance playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. A sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random, rather than sequential order. To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RW you are listening to in random order, press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play.

(Music Navigator): Use the music navigator feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label. The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It might take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of MP3/WMA files recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW.

To cancel music navigator while the player is scanning, press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label or eject the disc.

The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc in the background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.

Once the disc has been scanned, the player defaults to playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display between the arrows. If you want to listen to MP3/WMA files by another artist, press the pushbutton located below either arrow button. The disc goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing either button until the desired artist is displayed.

To change from playback by artist to playback by album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the album button. Press the pushbutton below the back label to return to the main music navigator screen. Now the album name is displayed on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begin to play. Once all songs from that album are played, the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA files from that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA playback.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment.

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot. Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected, "No Aux Input Device" displays.

If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not indicate "No Aux Input Device". If a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available). See "Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)" later in this section, or "Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks" under, RearSeatEntertainmentSystemonpage305for more information.

If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only) through the remote control.

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message	Condition Action Required
XL (Explicit Language Channels)	XL on the radio display, after the channel name, indicates content with explicit language.	These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a customer's request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating Updating enc	cryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no action is required. This process should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal Loss of signal	The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM^TM signal. When you move into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM Acquiring channel	audio (after four second delay)	The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data. No action is needed. This message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air Channel	not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another channel.
Channel Unavail Channel	no longer available	This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station was one of the presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Artist Info Artist Name	Feature not available	No artist information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly.
No Title Info Song/Program	Title not available	No song title information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly.
No CAT Info Category Name	not available	No category information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly.
No Information No Text/Informational message available		No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Radio Display Message	Condition Action Required
CAT Not Found No channel	available for the chosen category	There are no channels available for the selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Theftlocked Theft lock	active The XM ^TM receiver in	the vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM ^TM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message appears after having your vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
XM Radio ID Radio ID label	(channel 0)	If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the XM ^TM Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed to activate the service.
Unknown Radio ID not known	(should only be if hardware failure)	If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Check XM Receivr Hardware	are failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
XM Not Available XM ^TM No	Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Navigation/Radio System

Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.

The navigation system has built-in features intended to minimize driver distraction. Technology alone, no matter how advanced, can never replace your own judgment. See the Navigation System manual for some tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.

Rear Seat Entertainment System

Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system works with the vehicle's audio system. The DVD player is part of the front radio. The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD player, a video display screen, audio/video jacks, two wireless headphones, and a remote control. See Radiowith CDandDVDonpage273for more information on the vehicle's audio/DVD system.

Before You Drive

The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only. The driver cannot safely view the video screen while driving and should not try to do so.

In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE system might not work until the temperature is within the operating range. The operating range for the RSE system is above -4^ ( -20^ ) or below 140^ ( 60^ ). If the temperature of your vehicle is outside of this range, heat or cool the vehicle until the temperature is within the operating range of the RSE system.

Parental Control

The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature, depending on which radio you have. To enable Parental Control, press and hold the radio power button for more than two seconds to stop all system features such as: radio, video screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD. While Parental Control is on, a padlock icon displays.

When the radio is turned back on, Parental Control is unlocked.

Headphones

Line drawing of a pair of headphones (no text or symbols)

The RSE includes two 2-channel wireless headphones that are dedicated to this system. These headphones are used to listen to media such as CDs, DVDs, MP3s, DVDAs, radio, any auxiliary source connected to A/V jacks, or the auxiliary input jack, if your vehicle has this feature. The wireless headphones have an On/Off button, channel 1/2 switch, and a volume control.

Push the power button to turn on the headphones. An indicator light located on the headphones comes on. If the light does not come on, the batteries might need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section for more information. Switch the headphones to Off when not in use. Channel 1 is dedicated to the video screen, while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA selections.

Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the RSE overhead console. The headphones shut off automatically to save the battery power if the RSE system and RSA are shut off or if the headphones are out of range of the transmitters for more than three minutes. If you move too far forward or step out of the vehicle, the headphones lose the audio signal.

The headphones automatically turns off after four hours of continuous use.

To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the volume control located on the right side.

For optimal audio performance, the headphones must be worn correctly. The symbol L (Left) appears on the upper left side, above the ear pad and should be positioned on the left ear. The symbol R (Right) appears on the upper right side, above the ear pad and should be positioned on the right ear.

Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones and repairs will not be covered by your warranty. Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.

If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones become worn or damaged, the pads can be replaced separately from the headphone set through your dealer/retailer for more information.

Headphones should be stored in the front floor console and not in the front seat back pocket. Headphone damage can occur when the second row seats are folded forward.

Battery Replacement

To change the batteries on the headphones, do the following:

1. Turn the screw with a coin or screw driver to loosen the battery door located on the left side of the headphones. Slide the battery door open.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment. Make sure that they are installed correctly, using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door screw.

If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, dry place.

Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

The A/V jacks located on the rear of the floor console, allow audio or video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system. Adapter connectors or cables may be required to connect the auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for proper usage.

The A/V jacks are color coded to match typical home entertainment system equipment. The yellow jack (A) is for the video input. The white jack (B) is for the left audio input. The red jack (C) is for the right audio input.

Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the radio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect an external auxiliary device to the color-coded A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen power on. If the video screen is in the DVD player mode, pressing the AUX (auxiliary) button on the remote control switches the video screen from the DVD player mode to the auxiliary device. The radio can listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary. See RadiowithCD andDVDonpage273for more information.

How to Change the RSE Video Screen Settings

The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom), screen brightness, and setup menu language can be changed from the on screen setup menu. To change any feature, do the following:

1. Press the display menu button on the remote control.
2. Use the remote control menu navigation arrows and the enter button to use the setup menu.
3. Press the display menu button again to remove the setup menu from the screen.

Audio Output

Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be heard through the following possible sources:

• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system, if your vehicle has this feature.

The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to the wireless headphones, if there is audio available. See “Headphones” earlier in this section for more information.

When a device is connected to the A/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliary input jack, if your vehicle has this feature, the rear seat passengers are able to hear audio from the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired headphones. The front seat passengers are able to listen to playback from this device through the vehicle speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio.

Video Screen

The video screen is located in the RSE overhead console.

To use the video screen, do the following:

1. Push the release button located on the RSE overhead console.
2. Move the screen to the desired position.

When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its locked position.

If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked position, the screen remains on. This is normal. The DVD continues to play through the previous audio source. Use the remote control power button or eject the disc to turn off the screen.

The RSE overhead console contains the IR transmitters for the wireless headphones and the IR receivers for the remote control. They are located at the rear of the console.

Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video Screen” later in this section for more information.

Remote Control

To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter window at the rear of the RSE overhead console and press the desired button. Direct sunlight or very bright light can affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to receive signals from the remote control. If the remote control does not seem to be working, the batteries might need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section. Objects blocking the line of sight can also affect the function of the remote control.

If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, the remote control power button can be used to turn on the video screen display and start the disc. The radio can also turn on the video screen display. See RadiowithCDandDVDonpage273 for more information.

Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or in direct sunlight can damage it, and the repairs will not be covered by your warranty. Keep the remote control stored in a cool, dry place.

Remote Control Buttons

(Power): Press this button to turn the video screen on and off.

(Illumination): Press this button to turn on the remote control backlight. The backlight automatically times out after 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while the backlight is on.

(Title): Press this button to return the DVD to the main menu of the DVD. This function can vary for each disc.

(Main Menu): Press this button to access the DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making a selection, press the enter button. This button only operates when using a DVD.

▲, ▼, ◀, ▶ (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.

◀(Enter): Press this button to select the choice that is highlighted in any menu.

☐(Display Menu): Press this button to adjust the brightness, screen display mode (normal, full, or zoom), and display the language menu.

(Return): Press this button to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu. This button operates only when the display menu or a DVD menu is active.

(Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press this button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.

▶ || (Play/Pause): Press this button to start playing a DVD. Press this button while a DVD is playing to pause it. Press it again to continue playing the DVD.

When the DVD is playing, depending on the radio, you might be able to do slow play by pressing the pause button then pressing the fast forward button. The DVD continues playing in a slow play mode. Depending on the radio, you might also perform reverse slow play by pressing the pause button and then pressing the fast reverse button. To cancel slow play mode, press the play/pause button.

◀ (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button to return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press this button again to go to the previous track or chapter. This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews.

▶ (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to go to the beginning of the next chapter or track. This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews.

(Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD video, press the play button. To stop fast reversing a DVD audio or CD, release the fast reverse button. This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews.
▶(Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD video, press the play button. To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio or CD, release the fast forward button. This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews.
(Audio): Press this button to change audio tracks on DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is playing. The format and content of this function vary for each disc.
☐ (Subtitles): Press this button to turn ON/OFF subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a DVD is playing. The format and content of this function vary for each disc.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the system between the DVD player and an auxiliary source.

☐(Camera): Press this button to change camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is playing. The format and content of this function vary for each disc.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad provides the capability of direct chapter or track number selection.
☒(Clear): Press this button within three seconds after entering a numeric selection, to clear all numeric inputs.

10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to select chapter or track numbers greater than nine. Press this button before entering the number. If the remote control becomes lost or damaged, a new universal remote control can be purchased. If this happens, make sure the universal remote control uses a code set of Toshiba ^® .

Battery Replacement

To change the remote control batteries, do the following:

1. Remove the battery compartment door located on the bottom of the remote control.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment. Make sure that they are installed correctly, using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment.
3. Close the battery door securely.

If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, dry place.

Problem Recommended Action
No power. The ignition might	Not be turned on or in accessory.
The picture does not fill the screen. There are black borders on the top and bottom or on both sides or it looks stretched out.	Check the display mode settings in the setup menu by pressing the display menu button on the remote control.
In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls.	Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.

Problem Recommended Action
The remote control does not work.	Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the remote control and the transmitter window.Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or installed incorrectly.
After stopping the player, I push Play but sometimes the DVD starts where I left off and sometimes at the beginning.	If the stop button was pressed one time, the DVD player resumes playing where the DVD was stopped. If the stop button was pressed two times the DVD player begins to play from the beginning of the DVD.
The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture or sound.	Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliary source mode.Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or buzzes.	Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range, and interference from cellular telephone towers or by using your cellular telephone in the vehicle.Check that the headphones are on correctly using the L (left) and R (right) on the headphones.
I lost the remote and/or the headphones.	See your dealer/retailer for assistance.
The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound.	Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVD player.

DVD Display Error Messages

The DVD display error message depends on which radio you have. The video screen may display one of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error: This message displays when there are disc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if the disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc is not from a correct region.

No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc is present when the EJECT button is pressed on the radio.

DVD Distortion

Video distortion may occur when operating cellular phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems (GPS) ^* , two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.

It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console

When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface, use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.

Cleaning the Video Screen

When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water. Use care when directly touching or cleaning the screen, as damage could result.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)

This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of the music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or other auxiliary sources. However, the rear seat passengers can only control the music sources the front seat passengers are not listening to (except on some radios where dual control is allowed). For example, rear seat passengers can listen to and control a CD through the headphones, while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones.

You can operate the RSA functions even when the main radio is off.

Audio can be heard through wired headphones (not included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA. If your vehicle has this feature, audio can also be heard on Channel 2 of the wireless headphones.

The audio system mutes the rear speakers when the RSA audio is active through the headphones.

(Power): Press this button to turn the RSA on or off.

Volume: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume of the wired headphones. The left knob controls the left headphones and the right knob controls the right headphones.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between the radio (AM/FM), XM (if equipped), CD, and if your vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

◀ ▶ (Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM™ (if equipped), press the left seek arrow or the right seek arrow to go to the previous or to the next station or channels and stay there. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio.

Press and hold the left seek arrow or right seek arrow until the display flashes, to tune to an individual station. The display stops flashing after the buttons have not been pushed for more than two seconds. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio.

While listening to a disc, press the right seek arrow to go to the next track or chapter on the disc. Press the left seek arrow to go back to the start of the current track or chapter (if more than ten seconds have played). This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the left seek arrow or right seek arrow to perform a cursor up or down on the menu. Hold the left seek arrow or right seek arrow to perform a cursor left or right on the menu.

PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the next preset radio station or channel set on the main radio. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio.

When a CD or DVD audio is playing, press this button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc.

When a disc audio is playing in the CD or DVD changer, press this button to select the next disc, if multiple discs are loaded. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the PROG button to perform the menu function, enter.

Theft-Deterrent Feature

THEFTLOCK ^® is designed to discourage theft of your vehicle's radio. The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it does not operate and LOCKED displays.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

If your vehicle has audio steering wheel controls, they could differ depending on the vehicle's options. Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the following:

(Next/Previous): Press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or to the previous radio station stored as a favorite.

While a CD/DVD is playing, press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or previous track or chapter.

(“∑” (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and release this button to silence the vehicle speakers only. The audio of the wireless and wired headphones, if your vehicle has these features, does not mute. Press and release this button again, to turn the sound on.

If your vehicle has the navigation system, press and hold this button briefly to initiate voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the Navigation System manual for more information.

If your vehicle has OnStar ^® , press and hold this button briefly to interact with the OnStar ^® system. If your vehicle also has the navigation system, press and hold this button briefly to initiate voice recognition and say “OnStar” to enter OnStar ^® mode. See the OnStar ^® Systemon page145in this manual for more information.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between the radio (AM, FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if your vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

+ 📁 – 📁 (Volume): Press the plus or minus button to increase or to decrease the radio volume.

▷ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to the next radio station while in AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped). Press this button to go to the next track or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot.

Radio Reception

Frequency interference and static can occur during normal radio reception if items such as cell phone chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.

AM

The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio reception, most AM radio stations boosts the power levels during the day, and then reduce these levels during the night. Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on your radio.

FM Stereo

FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM ^™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or through tunnels could cause loss of the XM ^™ signal for a period of time. The radio might display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.

Care of Your CDs and DVDs

Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD and DVD Player

The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

Multi-Band Antenna

The multi-band antenna is located on the roof of your vehicle. This type of antenna is used with the AM/FM radio, as well as OnStar ^® and the XM ^TM Satellite Radio Service System, if your vehicle has these features. Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up for clear radio reception. If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the radio system may be affected if the sunroof is open. Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere with the performance of the radio system and, if your vehicle has this feature, OnStar ^® . Make sure the multi-band antenna is not obstructed.

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

Your Driving, the Road,

and Your Vehicle 322

Defensive Driving 322

Drunken Driving 323

Control of a Vehicle 326

Braking 326

Antilock Brake System (ABS) 327

Braking in Emergencies 329

StabiliTrak® System 329

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System 332

Steering 332

Off-Road Recovery 334

Passing 335

Loss of Control 336

Driving at Night 337

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 339

City Driving 342

Freeway Driving 342

Before Leaving on a Long Trip 343

Highway Hypnosis 344

Hill and Mountain Roads 345

Winter Driving 347

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow 352

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ..... 352

Loading Your Vehicle 353

Towing 358

Towing Your Vehicle 358

Recreational Vehicle Towing 358

Towing a Trailer 362

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle

Defensive Driving

The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle: Buckle up. See SafetyBelts:They AreforEveryoneonpage24.

CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be ready for anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or expressways, it means “Always expect the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and be ready. Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving task makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to help do these things, or pull off the road in a safe place to do them. These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life.

Drunken Driving

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle:

• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, more than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, psychological, and developmental reasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than many might think. Although it depends on each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone who is drinking depends upon four things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker's body weight
- The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking
- The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol

According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

Illustration of various glassware including tall, round, and rectangular containers (no text or symbols)

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person's BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight will when each has the same number of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.

There is something else about drinking and driving that many people do not know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person's system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that person's chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Please do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a driver who will not drink.

Control of a Vehicle

The following three systems help to control your vehicle while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your vehicle. See StabiliTrak® Systemonpage329.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect your vehicle's performance. See Accessories and Modifications on page 377.

Braking

See BrakeSystemWarningLightonpage217.

Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second. But that is only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle's engine ever stops while you are driving, brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do, the pedal could get harder to push down. If the engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect your vehicle's performance. See Accessories and Modifications on page 377.

Antilock Brake System (ABS)

Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid.

When you start the engine and begin to drive away, ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and you might even notice that the brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, this warning light will stay on.

See AntilockBrake SystemWarningLight onpage218.

Line drawing of a car interior showing driver's seat, dashboard, and animal in background (no text or symbols)

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.

Line drawing of a person seated in a car, viewed from the side, with trees and a vehicle in the background (no text or symbols)

As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might hear the antilock pump or motor operate, and feel the brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies

With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even the very best braking.

StabiliTrak® System

Your vehicle has the StabiliTrak ^® system which combines antilock brake, traction and stability control systems and helps the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving conditions.

When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive away, the system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure there are no problems. You may hear or feel the system working. This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with your vehicle. The system should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h). In some cases, it may take approximately two miles of driving before the system initializes.

If the system fails to turn on or activate, the StabiliTrak® light along with one of the following messages will be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC): TRACTION CONTROL OFF, SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL, SERVICE STABILITRAK. If you see these conditions, turn the vehicle off, wait 15 seconds, and then turn it back on again to reset the system.

If any of these messages still appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC), your vehicle should be taken in for service. For more information on the DIC messages, see DriverInformation Center(DIC)onpage228.

Simple line drawing of a car with a wavy line underneath, enclosed in a triangle (no text or symbols)

The StabiliTrak ^® light will flash on the instrument panel cluster when the system is both on and activated.

You may also feel or hear the system working; this is normal.

Symbol of a person crossing a road barrier, no text or numbers present

The traction control disable button is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls.

The traction control part of StabiliTrak ^® can be turned off by pressing and releasing the traction control disable button.

Traction control can be turned on by pressing and releasing the traction control disable button if not automatically shut off for any other reason.

When the traction control system is turned off, the StabiliTrak ^® light and the appropriate traction control off message will be displayed on the DIC to warn the driver. Your vehicle will still have brake-traction control when traction control is off, but will not be able to use the engine speed management system. See “Traction Control Operation” next for more information.

When the traction control system has been turned off, you may still hear system noises as a result of the brake-traction control coming on.

It is recommended to leave the system on for normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to "rock" your vehicle to attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high wheel spin is required. See IfYourVehicleis StuckinSand,Mud,Ice,orSnowonpage352.

Traction Control Operation

The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak ^® system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine power to the wheels (engine speed management) and by applying brakes to each individual wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary.

The traction control system is enabled automatically when you start your vehicle. It will activate and the StabiliTrak ^® light will flash if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving. If you turn off traction control, only the brake-traction control portion of traction control will work. The engine speed management will be disabled. In this mode, engine power is not reduced automatically and the driven wheels can spin more freely. This can cause the brake-traction control to activate constantly.

Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively while the StabiliTrak ^® , ABS and brake warning lights and the SERVICE STABILITRAK message are displayed, you could damage the transfer case. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.

Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and this message are displayed.

The traction control system may activate on dry or rough roads or under conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the transmission. When this happens, you may notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise or vibration. This is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system activates, the StabiliTrak ^® light will flash and the cruise control will automatically disengage. When road conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may re-engage the cruise control. See CruiseControlonpage179.

StabiliTrak ^® may also turn off automatically if it determines that a problem exists with the system. If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle, you should see your dealer/retailer for service.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System

If your vehicle has this feature, engine power is sent to all four wheels when extra traction is needed. This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle. It is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for road conditions.

When using a compact spare tire on your AWD equipped vehicle, the AWD system automatically detects the presence of the compact spare and the AWD is disabled. To restore the AWD operation and prevent excessive wear on the clutch in your AWD system, replace the compact spare with a full-size tire as soon as possible. See Compact SpareTireonpage463for more information.

Steering

Power Steering

If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve. Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems — steering and acceleration — have to do their work where the tires meet the road.

Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places. You can lose control. See StabiliTrak ^® Systemonpage329.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect your vehicle's performance. See Accessories and Modifications on page 377.

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time for evasive action — steering around the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First, apply the brakes. See Braking onpage326. It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available.

Line drawing of a person driving a car with steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols)

An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o'clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

Off-Road Recovery

You may find that your vehicle's right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving.

Diagram of three cars driving on a curved road with dashed lane markings (no text or symbols)

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

Passing

The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two-lane highway waits for just the right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

- Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time.

- Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken center line

usually indicates it is all right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.

- Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following too closely reduces your area of vision, especially if you are following a larger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

- When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do not get too close. Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someone is not trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot.
• Check your vehicle's mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your vehicle's inside mirror, activate the right lane change signal and move back into the right lane. Remember that an outside convex mirror makes the vehicle you just passed seem farther away from you than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it might be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to the right.

Loss of Control

Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems — brakes, steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle's three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance is longer and vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You might not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down when you have any doubt.

Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid.

Driving at Night

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your vehicle's headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old driver might require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They might cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and are not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Black-and-white sketch of a car partially submerged in rain, with no visible text or symbols

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well because your vehicle's tire-to-road traction is not as good as on dry roads. And, if the tires do not have much tread left, you get even less traction.

It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if the windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape and keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.

CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They may not work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash, apply the brake pedal lightly until the brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems, too. The water may affect the brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you hit them.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under the tires that they can actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if the tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water's surface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through the engine's air intake and badly damage the engine. Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. If you try to drive through flowing water, as you might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can be carried away. As little as six inches of flowing

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this happens, you and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore police warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips

- Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray.

- Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tiresonpage425.

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. Watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

• Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You will save time and energy. See FreewayDrivingonpage342.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it. When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light.

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on the turn signal, check the mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.

Before changing lanes, check the mirrors. Then, use the turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, make sure you allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed according to the speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance at higher speeds, you might tend to think you are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long Trip

Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you must start when you are not fresh — such as after a day's work — do not plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you will find experienced and able service experts at dealers/retailers all across North America. They are ready and willing to help you if needed.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• WindshieldWasherFluid:Is the reservoir full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• WiperBlades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel,EngineOil,OtherFluids:Have you checked all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure?
• WeatherForecasts: What is the weather outlook along your route? Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway Hypnosis

Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior.
- Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check your vehicle's mirrors and instruments frequently.
- If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service, or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Black-and-white sketch of a mountain road winding through snow-covered slopes with pine trees and distant peaks (no text or symbols)

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

- Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system, and transmission. These parts can work hard on mountain roads.

CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.

CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down. They could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Always have the engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.

- Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let the engine do some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.
• You might see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.

Also see Tiresonpage425.

Driving on Snow or Ice

Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to be very careful.

Front view of a car on a road with motion blur effect (no text or symbols)

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble because it can offer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

StabiliTrak ^® improves your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road. Even with StabiliTrak ^® , slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions. Under certain conditions, you might want to turn the traction control part of the StabiliTrak ^® System off, such as when driving through deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. See StabiliTrak ^® Systemonpage329and IfYour VehicleisStuckinSand,Mud,Ice,orSnowon page352.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your vehicle's stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See AntilockBrakeSystem(ABS)on page327.

• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a Blizzard

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you. If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

Cartoon illustration of a car partially submerged in water with smoke rising (no text or symbols)

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind. This will help keep CO out.

Run the engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with the headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow

In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to spin the wheels too fast. The method known as rocking can help you get out when you are stuck, but you must use caution.

CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle's tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. And, the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage. When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting the transmission back and forth, you can destroy the transmission.

For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, see TireChainsonpage445.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out

First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels. Turn the traction control part of the StabiliTrak ^® System off. See StabiliTrak ^® Systemonpage329. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that could free your vehicle. If that does not get your vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If your vehicle does need to be towed out, see TowingYourVehicleonpage358.

Loading Your Vehicle

It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire label.

CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

Example Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar) of your vehicle. With the driver's door open, you will find the label attached below the door lock post (striker). The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more information on tires and inflation see Tiresonpage425and Inflation-TirePressureon page432.

There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs" on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity for your vehicle.

See TowingaTraileronpage362for important information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.

Example 1

Example 2

Item Description Total
A	Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 =	1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B	Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =	300 lbs (136 kg)
C	Available Occupant and Cargo Weight =	700 lbs (317 kg)

Item Description Total
A	Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 =	1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B	Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =	750 lbs (340 kg)
C	Available Cargo Weight =	250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 3

Item Description Total
A	Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 =	1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B	Subtract Occupant Weight 200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =	1,000 lbs (453 kg)
C	Available Cargo Weight =	0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle's tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to the rear edge of the driver's door.

The label shows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the Rating GAWR for either the front or rear axle.

CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else, they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.

CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to.

Towing

Towing Your Vehicle

Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See RoadsideAssistanceProgram onpage509.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.

Recreational Vehicle Towing

Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”). With the proper preparation and equipment, many vehicles can be towed in these ways. See "Dinghy Towing" and "Dolly Towing" following in this section.

Here are some important things to consider before you do recreational vehicle towing:

• What's the towing capacity of the towing vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer's recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment? See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you'll want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed. See BeforeLeavingon aLongTriponpage343.

Dinghy Towing

If you have a front-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be dinghy towed from the front. These vehicles may also be towed by putting the front wheels on a dolly. See "Dolly Towing" later in this section.

If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be dinghy towed from the front. You can also tow these vehicles by placing them on a platform trailer with all four wheels off of the ground. These vehicles cannot be towed using a dolly.

For vehicles being dinghy towed, the vehicle should be run at the beginning of each day and at each RV fuel stop for about five minutes. This will ensure proper lubrication of transmission components. Put the IGN (Ignition) fuse in to start the vehicle.

Silhouette of a car approaching a vehicle ramp, no text or symbols present

To tow your vehicle from the front with all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. To prevent your battery from draining while the vehicle is being towed, remove the IGN (Ignition) fuse from the underhood fuse block. See UnderhoodFuseBlockonpage479.

5. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY.

6. Shift your transmission to NEUTRAL (N).

7. Release the parking brake.

Notice: If you tow your vehicle without performing each of the steps listed under "Dinghy Towing," you could damage the automatic transmission. Be sure to follow all steps of the dinghy towing procedure prior to and after towing your vehicle.

Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing your vehicle, it could be damaged. Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing your vehicle.

Once you have reached your destination, do the following:

1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition key to OFF and remove the key from the ignition.
3. Reinstall the IGN (Ignition) fuse.

Notice: Don't tow a vehicle with the front drive wheels on the ground if one of the front tires is a compact spare tire. Towing with two different tire sizes on the front of the vehicle can cause severe damage to the transmission.

Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)

Simple line drawing of a van and a car with a no-smoking symbol above (no text or labels)

All-wheel-drive vehicles must not be towed with two wheels on the ground. To properly tow these vehicles, they should be placed on a platform trailer with all four wheels off of the ground or dinghy towed from the front.

Dolly Towing (Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Only)

Silhouette of a car pulling a vehicle on a ramp, with no visible text or symbols

To tow your front-wheel-drive vehicle from the front with two wheels on the ground:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Move the shift lever to PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.

Towing Your Vehicle From the Rear

Silhouette of a van and a car with a no-smoking symbol, no text or labels present

Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear could damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the warranty. Never have your vehicle towed from the rear.

Do not tow your vehicle from the rear.

Towing a Trailer

CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipment and drive properly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even at all. You and your passengers could be seriously injured. You may also damage your vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section. Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section. But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.

That's the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine, transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat. What's more, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.

If You Do Decide to Pull a Trailer

If you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you'll be driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch dealer/retailer about sway controls.
• Don't tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (805 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that you tow a trailer, don't drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and don't make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer. Don't drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on your vehicle's parts.

• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions). See “Tow/Haul Mode” later in this section.

Three important considerations have to do with weight:

• The weight of the trailer
• The weight of the trailer tongue
- And the total weight on your vehicle's tires

Tow/Haul Mode

Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. The purpose of the Tow/Haul mode is to:

• Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.
• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when the vehicle is unloaded.
• Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.
• Increase the charging system voltage to assist in recharging a battery installed in a trailer.

Simple black silhouette of a train or cargo cart with two wheels (no text or symbols)

Press this button on the console to enable/disable the tow/haul mode.

Simple black silhouette of a two-decker train on a flat roof (no text or symbols)

A light on the instrument panel will come on to indicate that tow/haul mode has been selected.

Tow/Haul may be turned off by pressing the button again, at which time the indicator light on the instrument panel will turn off. The vehicle will automatically turn off Tow/Haul every time it is started.

Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent of the vehicle's Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). See Weight of the Trailer later in this section. Tow/Haul is most useful under the following driving conditions:

• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load through rolling terrain.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in stop and go traffic.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in busy parking lots where improved low speed control of the vehicle is desired.

Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightly loaded or with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However, there is no benefit to the selection of Tow/Haul when the vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.

Look in the following chart to find the maximum trailer weight for your vehicle.

Package	Maximum Trailer Weight	*GCWR
Front-Wheel Drive	4,500 lbs(2 041 kg)	9,500 lbs(4 309 kg)
All-Wheel Drive	4,500 lbs(2 041 kg)	9,700 lbs(4 400 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be exceeded.

Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices. See CustomerAssistance Officesonpage508for more information.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See LoadingYour Vehicleonpage353for more information about your vehicle's maximum load capacity.

Two identical line drawings of a train on a balance scale, labeled A and B (no text or symbols on the figures themselves)

If you're using a weight-carrying hitch or a weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10-15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).

After you've loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren't, you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer.

Trailering may also be limited by the vehicle's ability to carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce your trailering capacity more than the total of the additional weight.

Consider the following example:

A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:

$$ \begin{array}{l l} 1 4, 0 0 0 \text { lbs (6350 kg) } & \text { GCWR } \ - 5, 5 0 0 \text { lbs (2495 kg) } & \text { Vehicle Weight } \ \hline 8, 5 0 0 \text { lbs (3855 kg) } & \text { Trailer Rating } \end{array} $$

You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the weight is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on the rear axle will be greater than just the weight itself, as much as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the rear axle could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to, but within the limit for RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).

But let's say your specific vehicle is equipped with some of the latest options and you have a front seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the front axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axle weight. Your vehicle now weighs:

2,800 lbs (1270 kg)	+	300 lbs (136 kg)	Front
2,700 lbs (1225 kg)	+	400 lbs (181 kg)	Rear
6,200 lbs (2812 kg)			Total

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you may think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity to stay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think you must limit tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you must still consider the effect on the rear axle. Because your rear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs (408 kg) on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR. The effect of tongue weight is about

1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being able to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight. Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight, you can expect that the largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).

It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure you are not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh your vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle's Tires

Be sure your vehicle's tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. You'll find these numbers on the Certification/Tire label. See Loading YourVehicleonpage353. Then be sure you don't go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.

Hitches

It's important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you'll need the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch. If you don't seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle. See EngineExhaustonpage137. Dirt and water can, too.

Safety Chains

You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer's recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

If you tow more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg), use trailer brakes. Because your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, don't try to tap into your vehicle's hydraulic brake system. If you do, both brake systems won't work well, or at all.

Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you'll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly.

Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Before setting out for the open road, you'll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns.

Passing

You'll need more passing distance up ahead when you're towing a trailer. And, because you're a good deal longer, you'll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.

When you're turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won't strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check with your dealer/retailer. The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you're about to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It's important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

Driving on Grades

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger and load carrying vehicle. If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. Because of the added load of the trailer, your vehicle's engine may overheat on hot days, when going up a long or steep grade with a trailer. If the engine coolant temperature gage indicates overheating, turn off the air conditioning to reduce engine load, pull off the road and stop in a safe spot.

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don't shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed to around 55 mph (88 km/h) to reduce the possibility of the engine and the transmission overheating.

Parking on Hills

CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here's how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don't shift into PARK (P).

When parking uphill, turn your wheels away from the curb. When parking downhill, turn your wheels into the curb.

1. Have someone place chocks behind the trailer wheels.

2. When the chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.

3. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake and shift into PARK (P).

4. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you:

2. start your engine,

3. shift into a gear, and

4. release the parking brake.

5. Let up on the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
7. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer Towing

Your vehicle will need service more often when you're pulling a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenanceonpage488for more information. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid (don't overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, drive belt, cooling system and brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you're trailering, it's a good idea to review this information before you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Trailer Wiring Harness

Your vehicle is equipped with the following wiring harness for towing a trailer.

Basic Trailer Wiring

The trailer wiring harness, with a seven-pin connector, is located at the rear of the vehicle and is tied to the vehicle's frame. The harness connector can be plugged into a seven-pin universal heavy-duty trailer connector available through your dealer/retailer.

The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer circuits:

• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
- Brown: Taillamps
- White: Ground
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps
- Red: Battery Feed*
• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*

*The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the underhood electrical center, but the wires are not connected. They should be connected by your dealer/retailer or a qualified service center.

If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery, press the tow/haul mode button located at the end of the shift lever. This will boost the vehicle system voltage and properly charge the battery. If the trailer is too light for tow/haul mode, you can turn on the headlamps (Non-HID only) as a second way to boost the vehicle system and charge the battery.

Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing

Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheatingonpage400.

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

Service 377

Accessories and Modifications 377

California Proposition 65 Warning 378

Doing Your Own Service Work 378

Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle 379

Fuel 379

Gasoline Octane 379

Gasoline Specifications 379

California Fuel 380

Additives 380

Fuels in Foreign Countries 381

Filling the Tank 381

Filling a Portable Fuel Container 384

Checking Things Under the Hood 384

Hood Release 385

Engine Compartment Overview 386

Engine Oil 387

Engine Oil Life System 390

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 392

Automatic Transmission Fluid 394

Engine Coolant 396

Radiator Pressure Cap 399

Engine Overheating 400

Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode 402

Cooling System 402

Power Steering Fluid 408

Windshield Washer Fluid 409

Brakes 410

Battery 413

Jump Starting 414

All-Wheel Drive 420

Headlamp Aiming 421

Bulb Replacement 422

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ..... 422

Halogen Bulbs 422

License Plate Lamp 423

Replacement Bulbs 423

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..... 424

Tires 425

Tire Sidewall Labeling 426

Tire Terminology and Definitions 429

Inflation - Tire Pressure 432

Tire Pressure Monitor System 433

Tire Inspection and Rotation 438

When It Is Time for New Tires 440

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

Buying New Tires 440

Different Size Tires and Wheels 442

Uniform Tire Quality Grading 442

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 444

Wheel Replacement 444

Tire Chains 445

If a Tire Goes Flat 446

Changing a Flat Tire 447

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ...... 448

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 451

Secondary Latch System 456

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 459

Compact Spare Tire 463

Appearance Care 464

Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ..... 464

Fabric/Carpet 465

Leather 466

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Surfaces 467

Care of Safety Belts 467

Weatherstrips 467

Washing Your Vehicle 468

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses 468

Finish Care 468

Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades 469

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels and Trim 470

Tires 471

Sheet Metal Damage 471

Finish Damage 471

Underbody Maintenance 472

Chemical Paint Spotting 472

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials 473

Vehicle Identification 474

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 474

Service Parts Identification Label 474

Electrical System 475

High Voltage Devices and Wiring 475

Add-On Electrical Equipment 475

Windshield Wiper Fuses 475

Power Windows and Other Power Options 476

Fuses and Circuit Breakers 476

Instrument Panel Fuse Block 476

Underhood Fuse Block 479

Capacities and Specifications 483

Service

Your dealer/retailer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer/retailer for all your service needs. You will get genuine Saturn parts and Saturn-trained and supported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your Saturn vehicle all Saturn. Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.

ACDelco®

Accessories and Modifications

When you add non-Saturn accessories to your vehicle they can affect your vehicle's performance and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like anti-lock brakes, traction control, and stability control. Some of these accessories may even cause malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.

Saturn accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on your vehicle. Your Saturn retailer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine Saturn accessories. When you go to your Saturn retailer and ask for Saturn accessories, you will know that Saturn-trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine Saturn accessories.

California Proposition 65 Warning

Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some component wear by-products contain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it.

- Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, experience, the proper replacement parts, and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task.

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

- Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and other fasteners. English and metric fasteners can be easily confused. If you use the wrong fasteners, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work, you should use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see ServicePublications OrderingInformationonpage518.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see ServicingYourAirbag-EquippedVehicleon page91.

You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See MaintenanceRecord onpage500.

Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle

Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

Fuel

Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance, we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.

Gasoline Octane

Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher. For best performance or trailer towing, you could choose to use middle grade 89 octane unleaded gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87, you might notice an audible knocking noise when you drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service.

Gasoline Specifications

At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives onpage380for additional information.

California Fuel

If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. See the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamponpage222. If this occurs, return to your authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered by your warranty.

Additives

To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing the emission control system to work properly. In most cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.

However, some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines, if they comply with the specifications described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage would not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system could be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.

Fuels in Foreign Countries

If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving.

Filling the Tank

CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others, read and follow all the instructions on the pump island. Turn off your engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle. This is against the law in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver's side of the vehicle.

Simple line drawing of a curved object and a circle on a horizontal surface, with an arrow pointing to the circle (no text or symbols)

To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in and release. The door will pop open.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with two circular components and internal components (no text or symbols)

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door.

CAUTION:

Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See WashingYourVehicleon page468.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicatorLampon page222.

If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), the TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will be displayed if the fuel cap is not properly installed.

CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer/ retailer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions system. See MalfunctionIndicatorLamponpage222.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs.

To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approved containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
• Do not use a cellular phone while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Under the Hood

CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood Release

To open the hood, do the following:

Silhouette of a car with exhaust pipe (no text or symbols)

1. Pull the hood release handle with this symbol on it. It is located under the instrument panel on the driver's side of the vehicle.

2. At the front of the vehicle, pull up on the center of the hood, and push the secondary hood release to the right.

3. After you have partially lifted the hood, gas struts will automatically take over to lift and hold the hood in the fully open position.

Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on properly.

Pull the hood down to close. Lower the hood until the lifting pressure of the strut is reduced. Then allow the hood to fall and latch into place under its own weight. Check to make sure the hood is closed. If the hood does not fully latch, gently push the hood down at the front and center of the hood until it is completely latched.

Engine Compartment Overview

When you lift the hood, here is what you will see:

A. Radiator Pressure Cap (Out of View). See RadiatorPressureCaponpage399.
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap. See Cooling Systemonpage402.
C. Underhood Fuse Block. See UnderhoodFuse Blockonpage479.
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Startingonpage414.
E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power SteeringFluidonpage408.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See "When to Add Engine Oil" under EngineOilonpage387.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See "Checking Engine Oil" under EngineOilonpage387.
H. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See "Checking the Fluid Level" under Automatic TransmissionFluidonpage394.
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See "Brake Fluid" under Brakesonpage410.
J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See EngineAir Cleaner/Filteronpage392.
K. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See "Adding Washer Fluid" under Windshield WasherFluidonpage409.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See EngineCompartmentOverviewonpage386 for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

Pure line drawing of a medical or laboratory tool with a pointed tip and a horizontal bar (no text or symbols)

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick, you need to add at least one quart/liter of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specificationsonpage483.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range, the engine could be damaged.

See Engine CompartmentOverview onpage386for the location of the engine oil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range in the cross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS

HOT WEATHER

LOOK FOR THIS SYMBOL AND GM STANDARD GM6094M

DO NOT USE SAE 10W-40, SAE 20W-50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED

Look for three things:

- GM6094M

Your vehicle's engine requires oil meeting GM Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

- SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

- Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API).

Look for this information on the oil container, and use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below -20^ ( -29^ ), it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easier cold starting and better protection for the engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil Additives

Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all you need for good performance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will come on. Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service people who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system. It is also important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System

The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs where you change the oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message being turned on, reset the system.

If your vehicle does not have Driver Information Center (DIC) buttons:

1. Turn the ignition to ON, with the engine off. The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to access this display. Press the trip odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays.
2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE REMAINING shows 100%. You will hear three chimes and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will go off.
3. Turn the key to OFF. If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

If your vehicle has Driver Information Center (DIC) buttons:

1. Turn the ignition to ON, with the engine off.
2. Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays.
3. Press and hold the set/reset button until 100% is displayed. You will hear three chimes and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will go off.
4. Turn the key to OFF.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of used oil, ask your dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local recycling center for help.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See ScheduledMaintenanceonpage488for more information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with arrows indicating force or movement (no text or labels present)

See EngineCompartmentOverviewonpage386 for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter (away from vehicle) to release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the following:

1. Loosen the screws that hold the cover on.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Lift off the cover.
4. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter element and any loose debris that may be found in the air cleaner base.
5. Inspect or replace the air filter element.
6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the cover and reconnect the electrical connector.

CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, which will damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid

A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid at the intervals listed in Additional Required Services on page 491, and be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 497.

How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid

Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above 90^ (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180^ F to 200^ F ( 82^ C to 93^ C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50^ F ( 10^ C). If it is colder than 50^ F ( 10^ C), you may have to drive longer.

Checking the Fluid Level

Prepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear, pausing for about three seconds in each one. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:

Simple black gear icon with a sun-like shape inside, no text or symbols present.

The transmission fluid dipstick cap has this symbol on it, and is located near the front of the engine compartment.

See EngineCompartmentOverviewonpage386 for more information on location.

1. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Reinstall back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again.

1. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the crosshatched area.
2. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, twist & lock dipstick cap in place.

How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use. See RecommendedFluidsandLubricantsonpage497.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level into the crosshatched area on the dipstick.

1. Remove the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level. It does not take much fluid, generally less than one half of a pint (0.25 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages may not be covered by your warranty. Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended FluidsandLubricantsonpage497.

1. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under "How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid," earlier in this section.

2. When the correct fluid level is obtained, twist & lock dipstick cap in place.

Engine Coolant

The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL ^® engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL ^® extended life coolant.

The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating or if you need to add coolant to the radiator, see Engine Overheatingonpage400.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL ^® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to -34^ ( -37^ ).
• Give boiling protection up to 265^ (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ^® may cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at the first maintenance service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX-COOL ^® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

What to Use

Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and one-half DEX-COOL ^® coolant which will not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do not need to add anything else.

CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle's coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If coolant needs to be added more than four times a year, have your dealer/retailer check the cooling system.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives in your vehicle's cooling system, you could damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system. See RecommendedFluidsandLubricantson page497for more information.

Checking Coolant

The coolant recovery tank cap has this symbol on it.

See EngineCompartmentOverviewonpage386 for more information on the location of the coolant recovery tank.

The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level.

When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL COLD line or a little higher. When the engine is warm, the level could be above the FULL COLD level. The FULL COLD line is marked on the coolant recovery tank.

Adding Coolant

If more coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL ^® coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.

If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty, add coolant to the radiator. See Engine Overheatingonpage400.

CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost never have to add coolant at the radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure cap — even a little — when the engine and radiator are hot.

CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For information on how to add coolant to the radiator, see CoolingSystemonpage402.

Radiator Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.

See EngineCompartmentOverviewonpage386 for more information on location.

Engine Overheating

There is an engine coolant temperature gage on your vehicle's instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 220.

Your vehicle may also have an ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE and ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE message displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC WarningsandMessagesonpage239.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood.

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

See OverheatedEngineProtection OperatingModeonpage402for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty. See OverheatedEngineProtectionOperatingMode onpage402 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency.

If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:

1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the windows as necessary.
3. If you are in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the highest gear while driving — DRIVE (D) or LOW (L).

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes. If the warning does not come back on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three minutes while you are parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in this section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away.

Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode

This emergency operating mode lets your vehicle be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation. If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode, there is a significant loss in power and engine performance. The temperature gage indicates an overheat condition exists. Driving extended distances and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil life system. See EngineOilonpage387.

Cooling System

When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what you will see:

A. Engine Coolant Reservoir
B. Radiator Pressure Cap (covered)
C. Engine Cooling Fans

CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at least up to the FULL COLD mark. If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.

CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you can be burned. Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.

Notice: Engine damage from running your engine without coolant is not covered by your warranty.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ^® may cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX-COOL ^® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank

Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could cause your engine to overheat and be severely damaged.

If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery tank. If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL ^® coolant at the coolant recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system, including the coolant recovery tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See EngineCoolantonpage396for more information.

CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator pressure cap — even a little — they can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle's coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture.

CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle. If the overheat warning continues, there is one more thing you can try. You can add the proper mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it.

Technical line drawing of a car's front engine compartment showing internal components and structural features (no text or labels)

1. To remove the panel that covers the radiator cap, detach fasteners and lift off panel.
2. Remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system, including the upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.

1. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and remove it.

2. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL ^® coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck. See EngineCoolantonpage396 for more information about the proper coolant mixture.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with a coiled spring and pipe connection (no text or symbols)

1. Fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL COLD mark.

2. Reinstall the cap on the coolant recovery tank, but leave the radiator pressure cap off.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

1. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fan.

2. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck. Replace the pressure cap.

At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure to secure it tightly.

Power Steering Fluid

Simple line drawing of a circular diagram with a central dot, wavy lines, and an open book icon (no text or symbols)

The power steering fluid reservoir is located toward the front of the engine compartment on the passenger's side of the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overviewpage386 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering Fluid

It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering Fluid

To check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should be somewhere within the cross-hatched area on the dipstick. If the fluid is at the ADD mark, you should add fluid.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid to use, see RecommendedFluidsandLubricantsonpage497. Always use the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your vehicle and the damages may not be covered by your warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants RecommendedFluidsand Lubricantsonpage497.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to Use

When adding windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer's instructions before use. If operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

When the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low, a WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message will be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DICWarningsandMessageson page239for more information.

Simple line drawing of a funnel with dashed lines indicating hidden edges (no text or symbols)

Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overviewpage386 for reservoir location.

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer's instructions for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water does not clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle's windshield washer system and paint.

Brakes

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. See Engine CompartmentOverview onpage386 for the location of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have the brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well.

So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid when the linings are worn, then you will have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake warning light comes on. See BrakeSystem WarningLightonpage217.

What to Add

When you need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only. See RecommendedFluidsandLubricants onpage497.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake system, the brakes may not work well. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts. For example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in the brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle's painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See WashingYourVehicle onpage468.

Brake Wear

Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving, except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an accident. When you hear the brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications in CapacitiesandSpecificationson page483.

Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service might be required.

Brake Adjustment

Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts. When you replace parts of the braking system — for example, when the brake linings wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between the front and rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking performance you have come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.

Battery

Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery's label.

For battery replacement, see your dealer/retailer or the service manual. To purchase a service manual, see ServicePublicationsOrdering Informationonpage518.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery. This will help keep the battery from running down.

CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not careful. See Jump Startingonpage414for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt.

Jump Starting

If your vehicle's battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.

CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.
- They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that would not be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle's system is not a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.

1. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you do not want. You would not be able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL.

Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.

1. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it could save the radio!

2. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on the other vehicle. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) and a remote negative (−) jump starting terminal. See EngineCompartment Overviewpage386 for more information on the terminal locations.

CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light.

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

Be sure the batteries have enough water. You do not need to add water to the ACDelco® battery (or batteries) installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you do not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately.

CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running.

1. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.

Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with hoses and components (no text or symbols)

1. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the dead battery.

Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

1. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

2. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part, or to a remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery.

Line drawing of a car interior showing hand and seatbelt mechanism (no text or symbols)

1. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that move.

The electrical connection is just as good there, and the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.

Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal for this purpose.

1. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while.
2. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal.

graph TD
    A["Component A"] --> B["Component B"]
    B --> C["Component C"]
    C --> D["Component D"]
    D --> E["Component E"]
    E --> F["Component F"]
    F --> A
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other vehicle.

All-Wheel Drive

Be sure to perform the lubricant checks described in this section. There are two additional systems that need lubrication.

Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled Maintenanceonpage488.

How to Check Lubricant

(A) Drain Plug (B) Filler Plug

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.

What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended FluidsandLubricantsonpage497.

Rear Drive Module When to Check Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled Maintenanceonpage488.

How to Check Lubricant

(A) Filler Plug (B) Drain Plug

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.

What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended FluidsandLubricantsonpage497.

Headlamp Aiming

Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustment.

However, if your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you (for vertical aim).

If you believe your headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is recommend that you take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.

Bulb Replacement

For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see ReplacementBulbsonpage423.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer/retailer.

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting

CAUTION:

The high beam and low beam high intensity discharge lighting system operates at a very high voltage. If you try to service any of the system components, you could be seriously injured. Have your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician service them.

Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After your vehicle's HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was originally. This is normal.

Halogen Bulbs

CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package.

License Plate Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license plate lamps to the liftgate trim.

Diagram showing mechanical components with arrows indicating movement or force, no readable text or symbols present

1. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward through the lift gate trim opening.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the bulb straight out of the socket.

3. Install the new bulb.
4. Reverse steps 1 – 3 to reinstall the license plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number
License Plate Lamp 194

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your dealer/retailer.

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement

Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking. See ScheduledMaintenance onpage488for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the following:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield.

Diagram of a mechanical component with arrows indicating motion or force direction (no text or symbols)

1. Press the button in the middle of the wiper arm connector, and pull the wiper blade away from the arm connector.
2. Install the new wiper blade, and make sure the wiper blade locks into place.

For the proper size and type see Normal MaintenanceReplacementPartsonpage498.

Backglass Wiper Blade

1. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the backglass. The backglass wiper blade will not lock in a vertical position, so care should be used when pulling it away from the vehicle.
2. Rotate the wiper blade assembly, hold the wiper arm in position and push the blade away from the wiper arm.
3. Replace the wiper blade.
4. Return the wiper arm and blade assembly to the rest position on the glass.

Tires

Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your Saturn Warranty booklet for details. For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer's booklet included with your vehicle.

CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous.

Overloading your vehicle's tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction. You could have an air-out and a serious accident. See LoadingYourVehicleonpage353.

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

• Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your vehicle's tires are cold. See Inflation-TirePressureonpage432.
  • Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden impact — such as when you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire's tread is badly worn, or if your vehicle's tires have been damaged, replace them.

Tire Sidewall Labeling

Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. See the "Tire Size" illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification): Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation) code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. For more information see UniformTireQualityGradingon page442.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see CompactSpareTireonpage463and IfaTire GoesFlatonpage446.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and numbers following the DOT (Department of Transportation) code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure and inflation see Inflation-TirePressureon page432.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers define a tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. The letter T as the first character in the tire size means the tire is for temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification): Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines.

Tire Size

The following illustration shows an example of a typical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean that the tire's sidewall is 60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa). Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from driving. See Inflation-TirePressureon page432.

Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See LoadingYourVehicleonpage353.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle. See LoadingYourVehicleonpage353.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle. See LoadingYourVehicleonpage353.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity weight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle onpage353.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. See Inflation-TirePressureonpage432and Loading YourVehicleonpage353.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See WhenItIsTimeforNewTireson page440.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform TireQualityGradingonpage442.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading YourVehicleonpage353.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle's capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure. See "Tire and Loading Information Label" under Loading YourVehicleonpage353.

Inflation - Tire Pressure

Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not. If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation), you can get the following:

• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
  • Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you can get the following:

- Unusual wear

- Poor handling

- Rough ride

- Needless damage from road hazards

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows your vehicle's original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label, see LoadingYourVehicleonpage353. How you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.

When to Check

Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact SpareTireonpage463.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. Check the tire's inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure Monitor System

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, except the spare tire. TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle's tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.

The TPMS is designed to alert the driver, if a low tire pressure condition exists. If your vehicle has the Driver Information Center (DIC), the driver can also check tire pressure levels using the DIC.

When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning symbol located on the instrument panel cluster.

If your vehicle has the DIC feature, a message to check the pressure in a specific tire also appears on the DIC display. The low tire pressure warning symbol on the instrument panel cluster and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning message on the DIC display appears at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure. For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see DICOperationandDisplays (WithDICButtons)onpage229or DICOperation andDisplays(WithoutDICButtons)onpage235 and DICWarningsandMessagesonpage239.

You may notice, during cooler weather conditions, the tire pressure monitor light, located on the instrument panel cluster, and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message appears when the vehicle is first started and then turn off as you start to drive the vehicle. This could be an early indicator that the tire pressures are getting low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

Warning symbol with exclamation mark inside a vehicle head (no text or numbers)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

The Tire and Loading Information label (tire information placard) shows the size of your vehicle's original tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle's tires when they are cold. See Inflation-TirePressureon page432. For the location of the tire and loading information label, see LoadingYourVehicle onpage353.

Your vehicle's TPMS can alert you about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance. See TireInspectionand Rotationonpage438and Tiresonpage425.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid sealant can damage the tire pressure monitor sensors.

Resetting the TPMS Identification Codes

Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. Any time you rotate your vehicle's tires or replace one or more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position. The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for service.

The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire's air pressure. If increasing the tire's air pressure, do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the tire's sidewall. To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key.

You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel position, and five minutes overall to match all four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes to match the first tire and wheel, or more than five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions, the matching process stops and you will need to start over.

The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON with the engine off.
3. Using the DIC, press the vehicle information button until the PRESS √ TO RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS message displays. If your vehicle does not have the DIC buttons, press the trip odometer reset stem located on the instrument panel cluster until the RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS message displays.

4. If your vehicle has the DIC buttons, press the set/reset button. The horn sounds twice to indicate the TPMS receiver is ready, and the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays. If your vehicle does not have the DIC buttons, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem until the horn chirps twice and the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message is displayed.

5. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver side front turn signal lamp is on.

6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the tire's air pressure for five seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which may take up to 30 seconds to sound, confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire and wheel position.
7. Proceed to the passenger side front tire. The passenger side front turn signal lamp is on. Repeat the procedure in Step 6.

8. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire. The passenger side rear turn signal lamp is on. Repeat the procedure in Step 6.

9. Proceed to the driver side rear tire. The driver side rear turn signal lamp is on. Repeat the procedure in Step 6. Instead of a single horn chirp a double horn chirp signals the TPMS sensor has been matched to this tire and wheel position and the matching process is no longer active.

10. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.

11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label.

12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. If you replace one of the road tires with the spare, the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM message displays on the DIC screen. This message should go off once you re-install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Industry and Science Canada

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.

Tire Inspection and Rotation

Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See WhenItsTimeforNewTiresonpage440 and WheelReplacementonpage444for more information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenancepage488.

graph TD
    A[" "] --> B[" "]
    A[" "] --> C[" "]
    A[" "] --> D[" "]
    B[" "] --> C[" "]
    B[" "] --> D[" "]
    C[" "] --> D[" "]
    A[" "] --> E[" "]
    B[" "] --> E[" "]
    C[" "] --> E[" "]
    D[" "] --> E[" "]

When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See "Wheel Nut Torque" under CapacitiesandSpecificationsonpage483.

CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See ChangingaFlatTireonpage447.

When It Is Time for New Tires

Diagram showing layered geological strata with a conical topography line (no text or symbols)

One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire's rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
- The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage.

Buying New Tires

GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety, during normal use, as the original tires.

GM's exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle, including brake system performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire pressure monitoring performance. GM's TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire's sidewall by the tire manufacturer. If the tires have an all-season tread design,

the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow. See TireSidewallLabeling onpage426for additional information.

CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes, brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and you could have a crash. Using tires of different sizes, brands, or types may also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels. It is all right to drive with your compact spare temporarily, as it was developed for use on your vehicle. See CompactSpareTireonpage463.

CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle's tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating, and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle's original tires.

Your vehicle's original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information label. This label is attached to the vehicle's center pillar (B-pillar). See LoadingYourVehicleonpage353, for more information about the Tire and Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires and Wheels

If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes, rollover airbags, traction control, and stability control, the performance of these systems can be affected.

CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may not provide an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected. You may increase the chance that you will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use Saturn specific wheel and tire systems developed for your vehicle, and have them properly installed by a Saturn certified technician.

See BuyingNewTiresonpage440and AccessoriesandModificationsonpage377for additional information.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and temperature performance. This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction - AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature - A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance

The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel Replacement

Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces. If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new Saturn original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose control. You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis.

See ChangingaFlatTireonpage447for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous. You cannot know how it has been used or how far it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new Saturn original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash.

Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer's instructions. To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your vehicle's wheels. If you do find traction devices that will fit, install them on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes Flat

It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle's tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training. The jack provided with your vehicle is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

Changing a Flat Tire

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle's hazard warning flashers. See Hazard WarningFlashersonpage172for more information.

CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people. You and they could be badly injured or even killed. Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle.

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

To be even more certain the vehicle will not move, you should put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed. That would be the tire, on the other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.

graph TD
    A["Wheel 1"] --> B["Wheel 2"]
    B --> C["Wheel 3"]
    C --> A

The following information tells you how to use the jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

The tools needed to remove the spare tire are located in the storage compartment on the driver side, at the rear of the vehicle.

1. Open the jack storage compartment by squeezing down on the latch tab and pulling the cover off.

A. Tool Bag
B. Wing Bolt
C. Jack

1. Remove the wing bolt (B) by turning it counterclockwise
2. Push the jack (C) up out of the holding bracket.
3. Turn the jack on its side, with the bottom facing toward you.
4. Pull the jack straight out, bottom first.

The tools you will be using include the jack (A) and lug wrench (B).

Removing the Spare Tire

The compact spare tire is located under the vehicle, in front of the rear bumper. See Compact Spare Tireonpage463for more information about the compact spare.

A. Rear Convenience Center

D. Hoist Shaft

B. Lug wrench

E. Compact Spare Tire

C. Storage Compartment Cap Hole

F. Retainer

G. Hoist Shaft Assembly

1. Open the storage compartment door of the convenience center that is nearest the liftgate.
2. Move the carpet cutout that is located through the hole of the storage compartment.
3. Attach the lug wrench into the hoist shaft.
4. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue turning the wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle.

Line drawing of a hand using a tool to lift a circular mechanical component (no text or symbols)

1. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel opening to remove the spare tire from the cable.

2. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cable back up after removing the spare tire.

Do not store a full-size or a flat road tire under the vehicle. See StoringaFlatorSpareTire andToolsonpage459.

To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page451.

Technical line drawing of a car wheel assembly with suspension and mounting bracket (no text or symbols)

If the spare tire will not lower, the secondary latch could be engaged.

Do the following to check the cable:

1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable is visible.
2. If it is not visible, see SecondaryLatch Systemonpage456.
   If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning the lug wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot over-tighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. If the spare tire has not lowered, tighten the cable all the way and then loosen it at least two times.
   If the spare tire did lower to the ground, continue with Step 5 under "Removing the Spare Tire (Vehicles with the Rear Convenience Center)" listed previously.
5. If you still cannot lower the spare tire to the ground, see SecondaryLatchSystemon page456.

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See ChangingaFlatTireonpage447for more information.

2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover, loosen the plastic nut caps with the wheel wrench. They will not come off. Then, using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry along the edge of the cover until it comes off. Be careful; the edges may be sharp. Do not try to remove the cover with your bare hands.

Store the wheel cover securely in the rear of the vehicle until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.

If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, remove the wheel nut caps using the wheel wrench.

Line drawing of a car tire being adjusted for a hand, showing the wheel rim and tire (no text or symbols)

1. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do not remove them — using the lug wrench. For wheels with a wheel lock key, use the wheel lock key between the lock nut and lug wrench. The key is supplied in the front passenger door pocket.

Notice: If your vehicle has wheel locks and an impact wrench is used to remove the wheel nuts, the lock nut or wheel lock key could be damaged. Do not use an impact wrench to remove the wheel nuts if your vehicle has wheel locks.

1. To identify the appropriate jacking location, find the triangle (A) about 12 inches (30.5 cm) from the front tire or (B) about 10.5 inches (27 cm) from the rear tire.

The triangle is located near each wheel on the vehicle's exterior.

Notice: If a jack is used to raise the vehicle without positioning it correctly, your vehicle could be damaged. When raising your vehicle on a jack, avoid contact with the rear axle control arms.

1. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the compact spare tire near you.

CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle.

1. Attach the lug wrench to the jack, and turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack head 3 inches (7.6 cm).
2. Place the jack under the vehicle as identified in Step 3. Raise the vehicle by turning the lug wrench clockwise in the jack. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so that there is enough room for the spare tire to fit under the wheel well.
3. Remove all the wheel nuts and the flat tire.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with concentric rings and mounting brackets (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the plastic spare tire heat shield by pulling the rubber latch. Store the plastic spare tire heat shield. See StoringaFlator SpareTireandToolsonpage459for more information.

CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, a cloth or a paper towel can be used to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.

CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. Because the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel could fall off, causing a serious accident.

Line drawing of hands adjusting a brake caliper on a vehicle wheel (no text or symbols)

1. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, and spare wheel.

2. Install the compact spare tire.

3. Lower the vehicle by attaching the lug wrench to the jack and turning the wrench counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification. See CapacitiesandSpecificationsonpage483 for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See CapacitiesandSpecificationsonpage483for the wheel nut torque specification.

1. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence, as shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle's compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare, the cover or the spare could be damaged.

Secondary Latch System

Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is designed to stop the compact spare tire from suddenly falling off your vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire must be stowed with the valve stem pointing down. See StoringaFlatorSpareTireandToolsonpage459 for instructions on storing the spare tire correctly.

CAUTION:

Before beginning this procedure read all the instructions. Failure to read and follow the instructions could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get hurt. Read and follow the instructions listed next.

To release the spare tire from the secondary latch, do the following:

CAUTION:

Someone standing too close during the procedure could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does not slide off the jack completely, make sure no one is behind you or on either side of you as you pull the jack out from the under spare.

1. If the cable is not visible, start this procedure at Step 3.

Technical line drawing of a tire assembly with a screw inserted into the wheel (no text or symbols)

Technical line drawing of a vehicle suspension system with rotating wheel (no text or symbols)

All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle shown Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicle shown

1. Turn the folding wrench counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.

2. Attach the folding wrench to the jack and raise the jack at least 10 turns.

3. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire.

4. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the secondary latch spring.

5. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place. This lets you know that the secondary latch has released and the spare tire is balancing on the jack.

Technical line drawing of a car tire assembly with gear and wheel (no text or symbols)

1. Lower the jack by turning the folding wrench counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with hands operating a tool (no text or symbols present)

1. Disconnect the folding wrench from the jack and carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push against the spare tire while firmly pulling the jack out from under the spare tire with the other hand.

2. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel opening when the spare tire has been completely lowered.

3. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raise the cable back up if the cable is hanging.

Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can. You will not be able to store a spare tire using the hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools

Storing the Spare Tire

CAUTION:

The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to be stored with the valve stem pointing down. If the spare tire is stored with the valve stem pointing upwards, its secondary latch will not work properly and the spare tire could loosen and suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this happened when your vehicle was being driven, the tire might contact a person or another vehicle, causing injury and, of course, damage to itself as well. Be sure the underbody-mounted spare tire is stored with its valve stem pointing down.

CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.

To store the spare tire:

1. Lay the compact spare tire near the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem down.
2. Reinstall the plastic spare tire heat shield on the compact spare tire.

3. If the vehicle has aluminum wheels, remove the small center cap by tapping the back of the cap with the extension of the shaft.

4. Slide the cable retainer through the center of the wheel and start to raise the compact spare tire.

Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel.

1. When the compact spare tire is almost in the stored position, turn the tire so the valve is toward the rear of the vehicle.

This position helps when checking the air pressure in the compact spare tire.

1. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle. Continue turning the lug wrench until you feel more than two clicks. This indicates that the compact spare tire is secure and the cable is tight. The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened.

Front view line drawing of a car viewed from the rear, showing a black arrow pointing downward (no text or symbols)

1. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves, use the lug wrench to tighten the cable.

Storing the Flat Tire

Notice: Storing the full-size flat tire in the underbody hoist system can expose it to heat from the exhaust system. This can damage the tire and underbody hoist system. Do not store the full-size flat tire in the underbody hoist system.

1. Remove the cable package from the jack storage area.
2. Remove the small center cap by tapping the back of the cap with the extension of the shaft, if the vehicle has aluminum wheels.
3. Put the flat tire in the rear storage area with the valve stem pointing toward the rear of the vehicle.

1. Hook on end of the cable onto the outside portion of the liftgate hinge opposite (B).
2. Pull the cable (A) through the door striker (E), the center of the wheel (D), and the plastic spare tire heat shield (C), as shown.

Simple line drawing of a mechanical component with a spring-like extension (no text or symbols)

1. Hook the other end of the cable onto the outside portion of the liftgate hinge (B).

2. Pull on the cable to make sure it is secure.

3. Make sure the metal tube is centered at the striker.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical clamp or bracket assembly with a directional arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

1. Push the tube toward the front of the vehicle.

2. Close the liftgate and make sure it is latched properly.

Storing the Tools

A. Tool Bag

B. Wing Bolt

C. Jack

Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on.

1. Make that the bottom of the jack is facing toward you.
2. Turn the jack (C) on its side and place it down on the holding bracket.
3. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) by turning it clockwise.
4. To replace the cover, line up the tabs on the bottom of the cover with the slots in the cover opening. Push the cover in place, insuring that the upper front and rear tabs are in the opening and push the cover closed. Make sure that the center latch is fully engaged. This secures the cover in place.

Store the center cap or the plastic bolt-on wheel covers until a full size tire is put back on the vehicle. When you replace the compact spare with a full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-on wheel covers or the center cap. Hand-tighten them over the wheel nuts, using the lug wrench.

Compact Spare Tire

Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good shape in case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system will be automatically disabled when you use the compact spare. To restore the AWD and prevent excessive wear on the clutch in your AWD, replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as possible.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare. Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on your compact spare.

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle

Your vehicle's interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from your upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.

Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your vehicle's interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to your home furnishings may also transfer color to your vehicle's interior.

When cleaning your vehicle's interior, only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned. Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window defogger. When cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may become concentrated in your vehicle's breathing space. Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle's interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening your vehicle's doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your vehicle's glass. Should it become necessary, you can also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove odors from your vehicle's upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to your vehicle's interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage your interior and does not improve the effectiveness of soil removal.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers. Using too much soap will leave a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle's interior may result from the use of many organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/Carpet

Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to remove them first with plain water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation may result, clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or carpet.

Leather

A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently change the appearance and feel of your leather and are not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle's interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Surfaces

A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appearance and feel of your interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle's interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss on your instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water.

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, damp weather frequent application may be required. See RecommendedFluidsand Lubricantsonpage497.

Washing Your Vehicle

The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle's finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer/retailer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materialsonpage473. Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Avoid using hard brushes during cleaning. It may damage your vehicle's finish. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing YourVehicleonpage468.

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products from your dealer/retailer. See VehicleCare/AppearanceMaterialsonpage473.

If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle's finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts

Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually needed. However, you may use chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.

Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshield and backglass with glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions
- Sand and salt
- Heat and sun
- Snow and ice, without proper removal

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels and Trim

Your vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Use only Saturn-approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off immediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes.

Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

Tires

To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing products on your vehicle may damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer's/retailer's body and paint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage
Polishing Cloth Wax-Treated	Interior and exterior polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil Remover	Removes tar, road oil, and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner and Polish	Use on chrome or stainless steel.
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner	Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.
Glass Cleaner	Removes dirt, grime, smoke, and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire Wheel Cleaner	Removes dirt and grime from chrome wheels and wire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer	Removes dust, fingerprints, and surface contaminants. Spray on wipe off.

Description Usage
Swirl Remover Polish	Removes swirl marks, fine scratches, and other light surface contamination.
Cleaner Wax	Removes light scratches and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine Low Gloss	Cleans, shines, and protects in one easy step. No wiping necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate	Medium foaming shampoo. Cleans and lightly waxes. Biodegradable and phosphate free.
Spot Lifter	Quickly and easily removes spots and stains from carpets, vinyl, and cloth upholstery.
Odor Eliminator	Odorless spray odor eliminator used on fabrics, vinyl, leather, and carpet.

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver side. You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This code helps you identify your vehicle's engine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification Label

This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. The label has the following information:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
- Model designation
- Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Electrical System

High Voltage Devices and Wiring

CAUTION:

Exposure to high voltage can cause shock, burns, and even death. The high voltage systems in your vehicle can only be serviced by technicians with special training.

High voltage devices are identified by labels. Do not remove, open, take apart, or modify these devices. High voltage cable or wiring has orange covering. Do not probe, tamper with, cut, or modify high voltage cable or wiring.

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage would not be covered by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle's battery, even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see ServicingYourAirbag-Equipped Vehicleonpage91.

Windshield Wiper Fuses

The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, have it fixed.

Power Windows and Other Power Options

Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.

Fuses and Circuit Breakers

The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without, like the radio or cigarette lighter, and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

The instrument panel fuse block is located under the instrument panel on the passenger side of the vehicle. Pull down on the cover to access the fuse block.

Fuse Side

Fuses Usage
FRT/WSW Front	Windshield Wiper
SPARE Spare
HTD/SEAT Front	Heated Seats
STR/WHL/ILLUM	Steering Wheel Illumination
MSM Memory Seat Module
PWR/MIRRORS	Power Mirrors
DR/LCK Door Locks
AIRBAG Airbag System
LT/TRN/SIG Driver Side Turn Signal
REAR WIPER Rear Window Wiper
PWR MOD	PassKey Module, Body Control Module
BCK/UP/STOP Back-up Lamps, Stoplamps
HVAC Climate Control System
DISPLAY Display
RT/TRN/SIG Passenger Side Turn Signal
DRL* Daytime Running Lamps
RADIO	Radio
PDM	Power Mirrors, Liftgate Release
DRL 2** Not Used
INFOTAINMENT	Infotainment System
BCM Body Control Module
SPARE Spare
CTSY Dome Lamps
INADV/PWR/LED	Interior Lamps
ONSTR/VENT Emissions
AMP Audio Amplifier

Harness Connector	Usage
BODY Harness Connector

graph TD
    A["LT / PWR / SEAT"] --> B["PWR / WNDW"]
    C["RT / PWR / SEAT"] --> B
    D["PWR / COLUMN"] --> E["L/GATE"]
    F["UNLCK"] --> G["REAR/WSW"]
    H["LT/UNLCK"] --> I["DRL2"]
    J["SPARE"] --> K["FRT/WSW"]

Relay Side

Relays Usage

LT/PWR/SEAT Driver Side Power Seat Relay

RT/PWR/SEAT Passenger Side Power Seat Relay

PWR/WNDW Power Windows Relay

PWR/COLUMN Power Steering Column Relay

L/GATE Liftgate Relay

LCK Power Lock Relay

REAR/WSW Rear Window Washer Relay

UNLCK Power Unlock Relay

DRL2 Daytime Running Lamps 2 Relay

LT/UNLCK Driver Side Unlock Relay

DRL Daytime Running Lamps Relay

SPARE Spare

FRT/WSW Front Windshield Washer Relay

Underhood Fuse Block

The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle.

Simple electrical component symbol with a lightning bolt inside, no text or labels present

Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.

To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out.

Fuses Usage
LT PRK Left Parking Lamp
RT PRK Right Parking Lamp
TRLR PRK LAMP	Trailer Parking Lamps
AIRBAG Airbag System
PCM IGN Powertrain Control Module Ignition
AFS Adaptive Forward Lighting System
TRANS Transmission
REAR CAMERA	Rear Camera
EMISSION 1 Antilock Brakes System 2
TRLR BRK Trailer Brake
AWD All-Wheel-Drive System
TRLR PWR Trailer Power
EVEN COILS Even Injector Coils
RR HVAC Rear Climate Control System
SPARE Spare
ODD COILS Odd Injector Coils
SPARE Spare
LT HI BEAM Left High-Beam Headlamp
SPARE Spare
LT TRLR STOP/TRN	Trailer Left Stoplamp and Turn Signal
EMISSION 2 Emission 2

Fuses Usage
ECM	Engine Control Module
RT HI BEAM	Right High-Beam Headlamp
RVC SNSR Regulated Voltage Control Sensor
RT TRLR STOP/TRN	Trailer Right Stoplamp and Turn Signal
ECM 1	Engine Control Module 1
SPARE Spare
WPR/WSW	Windshield Wiper/Washer
SPARE Spare
PWR OUTLET	Power Outlet
AUX POWER	Auxiliary Power
RT LO BEAM	Right Low-Beam Headlamp
RR APO	Rear Accessory Power Outlet
LT LO BEAM	Left Low-Beam Headlamp
TCM	Transmission Control Module
TRLR BCK/UP	Trailer Back-up Lamps
HTD MIR	Heated Outside Rearview Mirror
ABS MTR Antlock Brake System Motor
FOG LAMP Fog Lamps
HORN	Horn
A/C CLTCH	Air Conditioning Clutch
FUEL PUMP	Fuel Pump
SPARE Spare
J-Case Fuses Usage
FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2
PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate
FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1
HVAC BLWR Climate Control System Blower
STRTR Starter
BATT 2 Battery 2
HTD WASH Heated Windshield Washer System
BATT 1 Battery 1
BATT 3 Battery 3
ABS MTR Antilock Brake System Motor
RR DEFOG Rear Defogger
S/ROOF/SUNSHADE	Sunroof, Sunshade

Relays Usage

FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3

FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

PRK LAMP Park Lamp

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

Relays Usage
RT TRLR STOP/TRN	Trailer Right Stoplamp and Turn Signal
LT TRLR STOP/TRN	Trailer Left Stoplamp and Turn Signal
IGN Ignition Main
CRNK Switched Power
PWR/TRN Powertrain
HI BEAM High-Beam Headlamps
WPR Windshield Wiper
WPR HI Windshield Wiper High Speed
RR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger
HID/LO BEAM	High Intensity Discharge (HID) Low-Beam Headlamps
SPARE Spare
FOG LAMP	Fog Lamps
HORN	Horn
A/C CMPRSR CLTCH	Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch
FUEL PUMP	Fuel Pump
TRLR BCK/UP	Trailer Back-up Lamps

Capacities and Specifications

The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended FluidsandLubricantsonpage497for more information.

Application	Capacities
	English Metric
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a	For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label located under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more information.
Cooling System 12.0 qt 11.4 L
Engine Oil with Filter 5.5 qt 5.2 L
Fuel Tank 22.0 gal 83.3 L
Transmission Fluid 9.5 qt 9.0 L
Wheel Nut Torque 140 lb ft		190 N•m
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission		Spark Plug Gap
3.6L V6	7	Automatic	0.043 inches (1.10 mm)

NOTES

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Schedule 486

Introduction 486

Maintenance Requirements 486

Your Vehicle and the Environment ..... 486

Using the Maintenance Schedule 486

Scheduled Maintenance 488

Additional Required Services 491

Maintenance Footnotes 492

Owner Checks and Services 493

At Each Fuel Fill 494

At Least Once a Month 494

At Least Once a Year 495

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ..... 497

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 498

Engine Drive Belt Routing 499

Maintenance Record 500

Maintenance Schedule

Introduction

Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, replacement parts, and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the Environment

Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance is important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance Schedule

We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few times a week. Or you might drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more frequent checks and replacements. So please read the following and note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your dealer/retailer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and Loading Information label. See LoadingYourVehicleonpage353.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octaneonpage379.

The services in ScheduledMaintenanceonpage488 should be performed when indicated. See AdditionalRequiredServicesonpage491 and MaintenanceFootnotesonpage492 for further information.

CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know-how and the proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a qualified technician do the work. See Doing YourOwnServiceWorkonpage378.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should have your dealer/retailer do these jobs.

When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service needs, you will know that trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.

If you want to purchase service information, see ServicePublicationsOrderingInformationon page518.

OwnerChecksandServicesonpage493tells you what should be checked, when to check it, and what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended FluidsandLubricantsonpage497and Normal MaintenanceReplacementPartsonpage498. When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine parts from your dealer/retailer.

Scheduled Maintenance

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on, it means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the engine oil life system might not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service technicians who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally, you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See EngineOilLifeSystemon page390for information on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message appears, certain services, checks, and inspections are required. Required services are described in the following for "Maintenance I" and "Maintenance II." Generally, it is recommended that your first service be Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II, and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous service performed was Maintenance I. Always use Maintenance II whenever the message comes on 10 months or more since the last service or if the message has not come on at all for one year.

Scheduled Maintenance

Service	Maintenance I	Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See EngineOilonpage387. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 390. An Emission Control Service.	•	•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. Seefootnote(g).• •
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See EngineAir Cleaner/Filteronpage392. Seefootnote(l).		•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See TireInspectionand Rotationonpage438and “Tire Wear Inspection” in AtLeastOnceaMonthon page494.	•	•
Inspect brake system. Seefootnote(a).• •

Scheduled Maintenance (cont'd)

Service	Maintenance I	Maintenance II
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed.	•	•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in this section.	•	•
Inspect suspension and steering components. Seefootnote(b).•
Inspect engine cooling system. Seefootnote(c).•
Inspect wiper blades. Seefootnote(d).•
Inspect restraint system components. Seefootnote(e).•
Lubricate body components. Seefootnote(f).•
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. •
Inspect throttle system. Seefootnote(j).•

Additional Required Services

The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers)	25,000(40 000)	50,000(80 000)	75,000(120 000)	100,000(160 000)	125,000(200 000)	150,000(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.	•	•	•	•	•	•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components.	•		•	•	•	•
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See EngineAirCleaner/Filteronpage392.		•		•		•
Change automatic transmission fluid(severe service). Seefootnote(h).		•		•		•
Change automatic transmission fluid(normal service).				•
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark plug wires. AnEmissionControlService.				•
Engine cooling system service (or every five years, whichever occurs first).AnEmissionControlService.Seefootnote(i).						•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.AnEmissionControlService.Seefootnote(k).						•

Maintenance Footnotes

(a) Visuallyinspectbrakelinesandhosesfor properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdiscbrakepadsforwearandrotors for surfacecondition. Inspectotherbrake parts, including calipers, parkingbrake, etc. Checkparkingbrakeadjustment.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or sign of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visuallyinspecthosesandhavethemreplaced iftheyarecracked,swollen,ordeteriorated. Inspectallpipes,fittingsandclamps;replace withgenuinepartsasneeded.Tohelpensure properoperation,apressuretestofthecooling systemandpressurecapandcleaningtheoutside oftheradiatorandairconditioningcondenseris recommendedatleastonceayear.
(d) Inspectwiperbladesforwear, cracking, orcontamination. Cleanthewindshieldandwiper blades, ifcontaminated. Replacewiperblades

thatarewornordamaged. SeeWindshieldWiper BladeReplacementonpage424andWindshield, Backglass,andWiperBladesonpage469for moreinformation.

(e) Makesurethesafetybeltreminderlightand allbelts,buckles,latchplates,retractors,and anchoragesareworkingproperly.Lookfor anyotherlooseordamaged safety beltsystem parts.Ifyouseeanythingthatmightkeepasafety beltsystemfromdoingitsjob,haveitrepaired. Haveanytornorfrayedsafety belts replaced. Alsolookforanyopenedorbrokenairbag coverings,and havethemrepairedorreplaced. Theairbagsystemdoesnotneedregular maintenance.
(f) Lubricateallkeylockcylinders, hoodlatch assemblies, secondarylatches, pivots, spring anchorandreleasepawl, hoodanddoorhinges, rearfoldingseats, and liftgatehinges. More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to acrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on weather strips with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(g) Afluidlossinanyvehiclesystemcould indicateaproblem.Havethesysteminspected andrepairedandthefluidlevelchecked.Addfluid ifneeded.
(h) Changeautomatictransmissionfluidifthe vehicleismainlydrivenunderoneormore oftheseconditions:
- Inheavycitytrafficwheretheoutside temperatureregularlyreaches90°F(32°C) orhigher.
- Inhillyormountainousterrain.
- Whendingfrequenttrailertowing.
- Usessuchasfoundintaxi,police,ordelivery service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill coolingsystem. This service can be complex, you should have your dealer/retailer perform this service. See Engine Coolanton page 396 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.

(j) Checksystemforinterferenceorbinding and fordamagedormissingparts.Replaceparts asneeded.Replaceanycomponentsthathave higheffortorexcessivewear.Donotlubricate acceleratororcruisecontrolcables.
(k) Visuallyinspectbeltforfraying,excessive cracks,orobviousdamage.Replacebeltif necessary.
(I) If you driveregularly underdusty conditions, inspect the filterate each engine oil change.

Owner Checks and Services

These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, dependability, and emission control performance of your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in RecommendedFluidsand Lubricantsonpage497.

At Each Fuel Fill

It is important to perform these underhood checks at each fuelfill.

Engine Oil Level Check

Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary. See EngineOilonpage387for further details.

Notice: It is important to check the engine oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level Check

Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See EngineCoolantonpage396for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check

Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation Check

Inspect your vehicle's tires and make sure they are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check the spare tire. See Inflation-Tire Pressureonpage432. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely. See ChangingaFlat Tireonpage447.

Tire Wear Inspection

Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire InspectionandRotationonpage438.

At Least Once a Year Starter Switch Check

CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake. See ParkingBrakeonpage133. Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your dealer/retailer for service.

Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check

CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brakeonpage133.
   Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON, but do not start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer for service.

Ignition Transmission Lock Check

While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition to OFF in each shift lever position.

• The ignition should turn to OFF only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The ignition key should come out only in OFF.

Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check

CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, your vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake's holding ability: With the engine running and the transmission in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism's holding ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake.

Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

Underbody Flushing Service

At least every spring, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect.

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid	/Lubricant
Engine Oil	Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle's engine, see EngineOilonpage387.
Engine Coolant	50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL®Coolant. See EngineCoolanton page396.
Hydraulic Brake System	Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield Washer	GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Power Steering System	GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).
Automatic Transmission	DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Usage Fluid	/Lubricant
Key Lock Cylinders	Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Canada 10953474).
Carrier Assembly — Differential (Rear Drive Module) and Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit)	SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in Canada 89021678) meeting GM Specification 9986115.
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Release Pawl	Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door Hinges and Rear Folding Seat	Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Conditioning	Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887).

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Part Part Number ACDelco		^ Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 —
Engine Oil Filter 89017524 PF48
Spark Plugs 12611882 41-107
Windshield Wiper Blades
Right – 20.8 inches (53. cm) 15254804 —
Left – 24.6 inches (62.5 cm) 15254805 —
Rear – 11.6 inches (30.0 cm) 15276259 —

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.6L V6 Engine

Pure diagram of pulley and belt system without any text, numbers, or symbols

Maintenance Record

After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 486. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 493 can be added on the following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date	Odometer Reading	Serviced By	Maintenance Ior Maintenance II	Services Performed

Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Date	Odometer Reading	Serviced By	Maintenance for Maintenance II	Services Performed

Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Date	Odometer Reading	Serviced By	Maintenance for Maintenance II	Services Performed

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

Customer Assistance and Information ..... 504

Customer Satisfaction Procedure 504

Online Owner Center 507

Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users .... 508

Customer Assistance Offices 508

GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ..... 509

Roadside Assistance Program 509

Collision Damage Repair 513

Reporting Safety Defects 516

Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government 516

Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government 517

Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn 517

Service Publications Ordering Information ... 518

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ..... 519

Event Data Recorders 520

OnStar 521

Navigation System 521

Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..... 521

Customer Assistance and Information

Customer Satisfaction Procedure

Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your retailer and to Saturn. Together we are committed to providing our customers with unparalleled service, before, during, and after the purchase of a Saturn vehicle, for total customer satisfaction. We call this the Saturn Difference. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle are resolved by your retailer's sales or service departments. If, for any reason, your ownership experience falls below your expectations, we suggest you take the following action:

STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Customer Assistance Liaison. Any member of the retail management team has the authority and the desire to resolve your concerns. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at this level.

STEP TWO: Should you need additional assistance, in the U.S., contact the Saturn Customer Assistance Center

by calling 1-800-553-6000. In Canada, contact the Saturn Customer Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999. A Saturn Customer Assistance Center team member will handle your call and assist in providing product and warranty information, the nearest retailer location, roadside assistance, brochures, literature and discuss any concerns you may have.

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This 17-digit number can be found on the vehicle registration or title, on the upper driver side corner of the dash, or on your roadside assistance key card.
• The name of your selling and servicing retail facility.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.

When contacting Saturn, please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a retailer's facility. That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern.

STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn and its retailers are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, Saturn and its retailers offer the additional assistance of a neutral party through our voluntary participation in a mediation/arbitration program called Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. This program is available at no cost to you, our customer.

Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case is generally heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you can reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.

Contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using the toll-free telephone number or by writing them at the following address:

BBB Auto Line Program

Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.

4200 Wilson Boulevard

Suite 800

Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: [phone]

This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage and other factors. Saturn Corporation reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its participation in this program.

STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):

General Motors Participation in the Mediation/Arbitration Program

In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process, from the time you file your complaint to the final decision, should be completed in approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you may call the Saturn Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-1999, or you may write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Program c/o Customer Communication Centre General Motors of Canada Limited

Mail Code: CA1-163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: [phone]

Your inquiry should be accompanied by your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center (United States only)

The Owner Center is a resource for your Saturn ownership needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:

• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle, including tips and videos and an electronic version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle's service history and maintenance schedule.
  • Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only available to members.

Refer to www.saturn.com on the web for updated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)

My GM Canada is a password-protected section of gmcanada.com where you can save information on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you will have access to:

• My Showroom: Find and save information on vehicles and current offers in your area.
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address and phone number for each of your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
• My Driveway: Receive service reminders and helpful advice on owning and maintaining your vehicle.
• My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.

Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users

To assist owners who have hearing difficulties, Saturn has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment in its Saturn Customer Assistance Center.

Any hearing- or speech-impaired customer who has access to a TDD or to a conventional Text Telephone (TTY) can communicate with Saturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users in Canada may dial 1-800-263-3830.

Customer Assistance Offices

Saturn encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. If a customer wishes to write to Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:

Saturn Customer Assistance Center

100 Saturn Parkway

Mail Code 371-999-S24

Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

1-800-553-6000

1-800-833-6000 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000

In Canada, write to:

Saturn Customer Communication Centre General Motors of Canada Ltd.

CA1-163-005

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com

1-800-263-1999

1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

GM Mobility Reimbursement Program

GM MOBILITY SM

This program, available to qualified applicants, can reimburse you up to \$1,000 toward eligible aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle such as hand controls, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.

The offer is available for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.

For more details, or to determine your vehicle's eligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call the Saturn Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000. Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.

In Canada, customers may call the Saturn Customer Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999. TTY users in Canada may call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance Program

For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call 1-800-553-6000; (Text Telephone (TTY): 1-800-833-6000).

For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you are automatically enrolled in the Saturn Roadside Assistance Program.

Who is Covered?

Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person driving this vehicle without the consent of the owner is not eligible for coverage.

Services Provided

The following services are provided in the U.S. and Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km), whichever comes first, and, in Canada only, up to a maximum of \$100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station (approximately \$5 Canada). In Canada, service to provide diesel may be restricted. For safety reasons, propane and other alternative fuels are not provided through this service.

• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service is covered at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if you have an active OnStar® subscription. To ensure security, the driver must present personal identification before lock-out service is provided. In Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or Highway: Tow to the nearest Saturn retailer for warranty service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-out assistance is provided when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is covered at no charge. The customer is responsible for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no charge if the vehicle does not start.
• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon request, Roadside Assistance will send you detailed, computer personalized maps, highlighting your choice of either the most direct route or the most scenic route to your destination, anywhere in North America, along with helpful travel information pertaining to your trip.

Please allow three weeks before your planned departure date. Trip routing requests are limited to six per calendar year.

- Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance

(Canada only): In the event of a warranty related vehicle disablement, while en route and over 250 kilometres from the original point of departure, you might qualify for trip interruption expense assistance. This assistance covers reasonable reimbursement of up to a maximum of \500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of \50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of \100/night), and (C) alternate ground transportation (maximum of \40/day). This benefit is to assist you with some of the unplanned expense you may incur while waiting for your vehicle to be repaired.

Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a copy of the repair order are required.

Once authorization has been given, your advisor will help you make any necessary arrangements and explain how to claim for trip interruption expense assistance.

- Alternative Service (Canada only): There could be times when Roadside Assistance cannot provide timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to secure local emergency road service, and you will be reimbursed up to \$100 upon submission of the original receipt to Roadside Assistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered. However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warranty repairs are the responsibility of the driver.

Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.

Calling for Assistance

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please provide the following to the Roadside Assistance Representatives:

• Your name, home address, and home telephone number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and delivery date of the vehicle
  • Description of the problem

Towing and Road Service Exclusions

Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated on a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound towing caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State, Provincial or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification.

Collision Damage Repair

If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle's resale value, and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to assure that your vehicle's designed appearance, durability, and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior accidents. In most cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle's originally designed appearance and safety performance, however, the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs. Your Saturn retailer may have a collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians and comparable equipment.

Insuring Your Vehicle

Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may require you to have insurance that assures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident Occurs

Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Do not leave the scene of an accident until all matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you are instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information to police and other parties involved in the accident. Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the accident. This helps guard against post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside Assistance. See Roadside AssistanceProgramonpage509for more information.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the towing service is taking it. Get a card from the tow truck operator or write down the driver's name, the service's name, and the phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance information and registration if you keep these items in your vehicle.

• Gather the important information you need from the other driver. Things like name, address, phone number, driver's license number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and policy number, and a general description of the damage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company from the scene of the accident. They will walk you through the information they need. If they ask for a police report, phone or go to the police department headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be necessary. This is especially true if there are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your vehicle. Whether you select a Saturn retailer or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage, make sure you are comfortable with them. Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and make sure you understand what work will be performed on your vehicle. If you have a question, ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process

In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs, GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts are not covered by your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurance company is paying for the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company's collision policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with that company. In such cases, you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within reasonable limits.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it could open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it could order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your retailer or Saturn Corporation.

To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA 400 Seventh Street, SW. Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government

If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport Canada Road Safety Branch 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn

In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, please notify Saturn.

Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:

Saturn Corporation 100 Saturn Parkway Mail Drop 371-999-S24 Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999, or write: Saturn Customer Communication Centre General Motors of Canada Limited CA1-163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications Ordering Information

Service Manuals

A variety of publications are available to you. Saturn service manuals are written for trained technicians, and in some cases, specialized tools and equipment are necessary to complete certain repairs. However, the manuals are available to owners who either have the training, or wish to gain a greater understanding of the technical aspect of their Saturn.

For additional publications information or to order publications in the United States, call toll free 1-800-2-SATURN or visit www.saturn-publications.com to order on-line.

In Canada, Saturn service manuals are available by calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.

Owner Publications

Information on how to obtain product bulletins and as described below is applicable only in the fifty U.S. states and the District of Columbia, and only for cars and light trucks with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) less than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copies of individual bulletins are also at your participating Saturn retailer. You can ask to see them.

In Canada, information relating to product service bulletins can be obtained by contacting your Saturn retailer.

Service Bulletins

Saturn regularly sends its retailers useful service bulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitors product performance in the field. We then prepare bulletins for servicing our products better. You can get these bulletins, too.

Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to the proper use and care of your vehicle. Some describe costly repairs. Others describe inexpensive repairs which, if done on time with the latest parts, may avoid future costly repairs.

Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a new or unexpected condition. Others describe a quicker way to fix your vehicle. They can help a technician service your vehicle better.

Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small number of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer or a qualified technician may have to determine if a specific bulletin applies to your vehicle. To order Saturn bulletins, call Saturn Publications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visit www.saturn-publications.com to order online.

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy

Your Saturn vehicle has a number of sophisticated computers that record information about the vehicle's performance and how it is driven. For example, your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance, to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide anti-lock braking to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may store data to help your dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed. These modules may also retain the owner's personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
- Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened
- How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling

This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

Important:EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Saturn will not access this data or share it with others except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in response to an official request of police or similar government office; as part of Saturn's defense of litigation through the discovery process; or, as required by law. Data that Saturn collects or receives may also be used for Saturn research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes, where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar

If your vehicle has OnStar ^® and you subscribe to the OnStar ^® services, please refer to the OnStar ^® Terms and Conditions for information on data collection and use. See also OnStar ^® Systemonpage145in this manual for more information.

Navigation System

If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the system may result in the storage of destinations, addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip information. Please refer to the navigation system operating manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions.

Radio Frequency Identification (RFID)

RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system security, as well as in connection with conveniences such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door openers. RFID technology in Saturn vehicles does not use or record personal information or link with any other Saturn system containing personal information.

NOTES

A

Accessories and Modifications 377

Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 92

Additives, Fuel 380

Add-On Electrical Equipment 475

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine 392

Air Conditioning 194, 198

Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator 214

Readiness Light 212

Airbag System 76

What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? 84

When Should an Airbag Inflate? 82

Where Are the Airbags? 79

Airbag Systems

Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 92

How Does an Airbag Restrain? 84

Passenger Sensing System 86

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 91

What Makes an Airbag Inflate? 83

All-Wheel Drive 420

All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System 332

Antilock Brake System (ABS) 327

Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ...... 218

Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ..... 470

Care of Safety Belts 467

Chemical Paint Spotting 472

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses 468

Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle 464

Fabric/Carpet 465

Finish Care 468

Finish Damage 471

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Surfaces 467

Leather 466

Sheet Metal Damage 471

Tires 471

Underbody Maintenance 472

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials 473

Washing Your Vehicle 468

Weatherstrips 467

Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades 469

Audio System 260

Audio Steering Wheel Controls 317

Care of Your CD and DVD Player 320

Care of Your CDs and DVDs 320

Audio System (cont.)

Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation Manual 305

Radio with CD 263

Rear Seat Audio (RSA) 315

Setting the Time 261

Theft-Deterrent Feature 317

Understanding Radio Reception 318

Audio System(s)

Radio with CD and DVD 273

Automatic Transmission

Fluid 394

Operation 129

B

Battery 413

Electric Power Management 187

Run-Down Protection 188

Before Leaving on a Long Trip 343

Brake

Emergencies 329

Brakes 410

System Warning Light 217

Braking 326

Braking in Emergencies 329

Break-In, New Vehicle 123

Bulb Replacement 422

Halogen Bulbs 422

Headlamp Aiming 421

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ..... 422

License Plate Lamps 423

Replacement Bulbs 423

Buying New Tires 440

C

Calibration 139

California Fuel 380

California Proposition 65 Warning 378

Canadian Owners 3

Capacities and Specifications 483

Carbon Monoxide 110, 137, 347, 362

Care of

Safety Belts 467

Your CD and DVD Player 320

Your CDs and DVDs 320

Cargo Cover 163

Cargo Management System 164

Cargo Tie Downs 163

CD, MP3 290, 296

Center Console Storage Area 161

Chains, Tire 445

Charging System Light 216

Check

Engine Light 222

Checking Things Under the Hood 384

Chemical Paint Spotting 472

Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems 55

Infants and Young Children 51

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 61

Older Children 48

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position 69

Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position 72

Where to Put the Restraint 59

Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ..... 470

Exterior Lamps/Lenses 468

Fabric/Carpet 465

Finish Care 468

Inside of Your Vehicle 464

Cleaning (cont.)

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Surfaces 467

Leather 466

Tires 471

Underbody Maintenance 472

Washing Your Vehicle 468

Weatherstrips 467

Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades 469

Climate Control System 194

Dual Automatic 198

Outlet Adjustment 205

Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System 206

Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System, Electronic 207

Clock 261

Collision Damage Repair 513

Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt 43

Compact Spare Tire 463

Compass 139

Content Theft-Deterrent 119

Control of a Vehicle 326

Convenience Net 163

Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage 220

Engine Temperature Warning Light 220

Heater, Engine 127

Cooling System 402

Courtesy Lamps 184

Cruise Control 179

Cruise Control Light 226

Cupholder(s) 161

Customer Assistance Information

Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users .... 508

Customer Assistance Offices 508

Customer Satisfaction Procedure 504

GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ..... 509

Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn 517

Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government 517

Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government 516

Roadside Assistance Program 509

Service Publications Ordering Information 518

D

Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic

Headlamp System 183

Defensive Driving 322

Delayed Entry Lighting 186

Delayed Exit Lighting 186

Delayed Headlamps 183

Delayed Locking 107

Disc, MP3 290, 296

Doing Your Own Service Work 378

Dome Lamp Override 185

Dome Lamps 185

Door

Delayed Locking 107

Locks 106

Power Door Locks 107

Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..... 107

Rear Door Security Locks 108

Driver

Position, Safety Belt 30

Seat Height Adjuster 10

Driver Information Center (DIC) 228

DIC Operation and Displays ...... 229, 235

DIC Vehicle Customization 250

DIC Warnings and Messages 239

Driving

At Night 337

City 342

Defensive 322

Drunken 323

Freeway 342

Hill and Mountain Roads 345

In Rain and on Wet Roads 339

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ..... 352

Winter 347

Dual Automatic Climate Control System 198

DVD

Rear Seat Entertainment System ...... 305

E

EDR 519

Electrical System

Add-On Equipment 475

Fuses and Circuit Breakers 476

Instrument Panel Fuse Block 476

Electrical System (cont.)

Power Windows and Other Power Options 476

Underhood Fuse Block 479

Windshield Wiper Fuses 475

Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter 392

Check and Service Engine Soon Light ...... 222

Coolant 396

Coolant Heater 127

Coolant Temperature Gage 220

Coolant Temperature Warning Light 220

Drive Belt Routing 499

Engine Compartment Overview 386

Exhaust 137

Oil 387

Oil Life System 390

Overheated Protection Operating Mode ..... 402

Overheating 400

Running While Parked 138

Starting 126

Entry Lighting 185

Event Data Recorders 520

Extender, Safety Belt 47

Exterior Lamps 182

F

Filter

Engine Air Cleaner 392

Finish Damage 471

Flashers, Hazard Warning 172

Flash-to-Pass 176

Flat Tire 446

Flat Tire, Changing 447

Flat Tire, Storing 459

Floor Mats 162

Fluid

Automatic Transmission 394

Power Steering 408

Windshield Washer 409

Fog Lamp

Fog 184

Fog Lamp Light 226

Fuel 379

Additives 380

California Fuel 380

Filling a Portable Fuel Container 384

Filling Your Tank 381

Fuels in Foreign Countries 381

Fuel (cont.)

Gage 227

Gasoline Octane 379

Gasoline Specifications 379

Fuses

Fuses and Circuit Breakers 476

Instrument Panel Fuse Block 476

Underhood Fuse Block 479

Windshield Wiper 475

G

Gage

Engine Coolant Temperature 220

Fuel 227

Speedometer 211

Tachometer 211

Voltmeter Gage 216

Garage Door Opener 149

Gasoline

Octane 379

Specifications 379

Glove Box 161

GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ..... 509

H

Hazard Warning Flashers 172

Head Restraints 17

Headlamp Aiming 421

Headlamps Bulb Replacement .... 422 Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic Headlamp System .... 183

Delayed 183

Exterior Lamps 182

Flash-to-Pass 176

Halogen Bulbs 422

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ..... 422

High/Low Beam Changer 175

Heated Seats 12

Heater 194

Heater 198

Height Adjuster, Driver Seat 10

High Voltage Devices and Wiring 475

Highbeam On Light 227

Highway Hypnosis 344

Hill and Mountain Roads 345

Hood Checking Things Under .... 384 Release .... 385 Horn .... 172 How to Use This Manual .... 3 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .... 29

|

Ignition Positions 124

Infants and Young Children, Restraints ..... 51

Inflation - Tire Pressure 432

Instrument Panel Overview .... 170

Storage Area 161

Instrument Panel (I/P) Brightness .... 184 Cluster .... 210

J

Jump Starting 414

K

Keyless Entry System 98

Keys 97

L

Labeling, Tire Sidewall 426

Lamps

Courtesy 184

Dome 185

Dome Lamp Override 185

Reading 187

LATCH System

Child Restraints 61

License Plate Lamps 423

Liftgate

Carbon Monoxide 109

Liftgate, Power 110

Light

Airbag Readiness 212

Antilock Brake System Warning 218

Brake System Warning 217

Charging System 216

Light (cont.)

Cruise Control 226

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ..... 220

Fog Lamp 226

Highbeam On 227

Malfunction Indicator 222

Oil Pressure 225

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 214

Passenger Safety Belt Reminder 212

Safety Belt Reminder 211

Security 226

StabiliTrak® Indicator 219

Tire Pressure 221

Tow/Haul Mode 227

Lighting

Delayed Entry 186

Delayed Exit 186

Entry 185

Parade Dimming 186

Lights

Exterior Lamps 182

Flash-to-Pass 176

High/Low Beam Changer 175

Loading Your Vehicle 353

Lockout Protection 109

Locks

Delayed Locking 107

Door 106

Lockout Protection 109

Power Door 107

Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..... 107

Rear Door Security Locks 108

Loss of Control 336

Luggage Carrier 162

Lumbar

Manual Controls 11

Power Controls 12

M

Maintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services 491

At Each Fuel Fill 494

At Least Once a Month 494

At Least Once a Year 495

Introduction 486

Maintenance Footnotes 492

Maintenance Record 500

Maintenance Requirements 486

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 498

Owner Checks and Services 493

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ..... 497

Scheduled Maintenance 488

Using 486

Your Vehicle and the Environment 486

Malfunction Indicator Light 222

Manual Lumbar Controls 11

Manual Seats 9

Memory Seat and Mirrors 13

Message DIC Warnings and Messages .... 239

Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar ^® and Compass 139

Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar ^® ..... 139

Outside Convex Mirror 144

Outside Heated Mirrors 145

Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors 143

Outside Power Mirrors 142

MP3 290, 296

MyGMLink.com 507

N

Navigation System, Privacy 521

Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation Manual .... 305

New Vehicle Break-In 123

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 498

O

Odometer 211

Off-Road Recovery 334

Oil Engine .... 387 Pressure Light .... 225

Oil, Engine Oil Life System 390

Older Children, Restraints 48

Online Owner Center 507

OnStar, Privacy 521

OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ..... 145

Operation, Universal Home Remote System 150, 154

Orange Covered Wiring 475

Other Warning Devices 172

Outlet Adjustment 205

Outlets Accessory Power 192

Outside Convex Mirror .... 144 Heated Mirrors .... 145 Power Foldaway Mirrors .... 143 Power Mirrors .... 142

Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode 402

Owner Checks and Services 493

Owners, Canadian 3

P

Paint, Damage 471

Parade Dimming 186

Park Aid 188

Park Brake 133

Park (P) Shifting Into .... 134 Shifting Out of .... 136

Parking Assist .... 188 Over Things That Burn .... 136

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 214

Passenger Sensing System 86

Passing 335

PASS-Key ^® III+ 121

PASS-Key ^® III+ Operation ..... 121

Power

Door Locks 107

Electrical System 476

Liftgate 110

Lumbar Controls 12

Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ..... 193

Retained Accessory (RAP) 125

Seat 10

Steering Fluid 408

Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column 173

Windows 116

Pretensioners, Safety Belt 47

Privacy 519

Event Data Recorders 520

Navigation System 521

OnStar 521

Radio Frequency Identification 521

Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..... 107

Q

Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 28

R

Radiator Pressure Cap 399

Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy 521

Radios 260

Care of Your CD and DVD Player 320

Care of Your CDs and DVDs 320

Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation Manual .... 305

Radio with CD 263

Radio with CD and DVD 273

Rear Seat Audio 315

Setting the Time 261

Theft-Deterrent 317

Understanding Reception 318

Reading Lamps 187

Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System 206

Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls 207

Rear Door Security Locks 108

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides 43

Rear Seat Armrest 163

Rear Seat Audio (RSA) 315

Rear Seat Entertainment System 305

Rear Seat Operation 18

Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts 40

Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper 178

Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with OnStar ^® and Compass ...... 139

Rearview Mirror with OnStar ^® 139

Reclining Seatbacks 15

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ..... 497

Recreational Vehicle Towing 358

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System 98

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System, Operation 100

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 451

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 448

Replacement Bulbs 423

Reporting Safety Defects Canadian Government .... 517 Saturn .... 517 United States Government .... 516

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint Systems 93

Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash 94

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 125

Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts 39

Roadside Assistance Program .... 509

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 352

Routing, Engine Drive Belt 499

Running the Engine While Parked 138

S

Safety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light 212

Pretensioners 47

Reminder Light 211

Safety Belts

Care of 467

Driver Position 30

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 29

Questions and Answers About Safety Belts 28

Safety Belts (cont.)

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides 43

Rear Seat Passengers 40

Right Front Passenger Position 39

Safety Belt Extender 47

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 39

Safety Belts Are for Everyone 24

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 38

Safety Warnings and Symbols 4

Scheduled Maintenance 488

Seats

Driver Seat Height Adjuster 10

Head Restraints 17

Heated Seats 12

Manual Lumbar 11

Memory, Mirrors 13

Power Lumbar 12

Power Seats 10

Rear Seat Operation 18

Reclining Seatbacks 15

Third Row Seat 21

Secondary Latch System 456

Securing a Child Restraint

Rear Seat Position 69

Right Front Seat Position 72

Security Light 226

Service 377

Accessories and Modifications 377

Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle 379

California Proposition 65 Warning 378

Doing Your Own Work 378

Engine Soon Light 222

Publications Ordering Information 518

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 91

Sheet Metal Damage 471

Shifting Into Park (P) 134

Shifting Out of Park (P) 136

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 38

Signals, Turn and Lane-Change 174

Spare Tire

Compact 463

Installing 451

Removing 448

Storing 459

Specifications, Capacities 483

Speedometer 211

StabiliTrak® System 329

StabiliTrak® Indicator Light 219

Starting Your Engine 126

Steering 332

Steering Wheel Controls, Audio 317

Steering Wheel, Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column .... 173

Storage Areas Cargo Management System .... 164 Center Console Storage Area .... 161 Convenience Net .... 163 Cupholder(s) .... 161 Glove Box .... 161 Instrument Panel Storage Area .... 161 Luggage Carrier .... 162 Rear Seat Armrest .... 163

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow 352

Sun Visors 118

Sunroof 165

System Identification, Universal Home Remote System 149

T

Tachometer 211

Telescopic Steering Column, Power Tilt Wheel 173

Theft-Deterrent, Radio 317

Theft-Deterrent Systems 119

Content Theft-Deterrent 119

PASS-Key ^® III+ 121

PASS-Key ^® III+ Operation 121

Time, Setting 261

Tire Pressure Light 221

Tires 425

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels, Cleaning 470

Buying New Tires 440

Chains 445

Changing a Flat Tire 447

Cleaning 471

Compact Spare Tire 463

Different Size 442

If a Tire Goes Flat 446

Inflation - Tire Pressure 432

Inspection and Rotation 438

Installing the Spare Tire 451

Pressure Monitor System 433

Removing the Flat Tire 451

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ..... 448

Secondary Latch System 456

Tires (cont.)

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 459

Tire Sidewall Labeling 426

Tire Terminology and Definitions 429

Uniform Tire Quality Grading 442

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 444

Wheel Replacement 444

When It Is Time for New Tires 440

Tow/Haul Mode 132

Tow/Haul Mode Light 227

Towing

Recreational Vehicle 358

Towing a Trailer 362

Your Vehicle 358

Traction

StabiliTrak® System 329

Transmission

Fluid, Automatic 394

Transmission Operation, Automatic 129

Turn and Lane-Change Signals 174

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever 174

U

Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ..... 188

Understanding Radio Reception 318

Uniform Tire Quality Grading 442

Universal Home Remote System 149

Operation 150, 154

System Identification 149

V

Vehicle

Control 326

Damage Warnings 5

Loading 353

Symbols 5

Vehicle Customization, DIC 250

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy 519

Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) 474

Service Parts Identification Label 474

Ventilation Adjustment 205

Visors 118

Voltage Devices, High and Wiring 475

Voltmeter Gage 216

W

Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ..... 209

Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages 239

Hazard Warning Flashers 172

Other Warning Devices 172

Safety and Symbols 4

Vehicle Damage 5

Wheels

Alignment and Tire Balance 444

Different Size 442

Replacement 444

Where to Put the Restraint 59

Windows 115

Power 116

Windshield

Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning 469

Washer 177

Windshield (cont.)

Washer Fluid 409

Wiper Blade Replacement 424

Wiper Fuses 475

Wipers 176

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper 178

Winter Driving 347

Wiring, High Voltage Devices 475

X

XM Radio Messages 303

Y

Your Vehicle and the Environment 486